Sam Electronics 1100 PDF

Technical Manual
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100
MULTIPILOT 1100
Including Installation Instructions

Software Version 4.0
Display Electronics Units

GE3062, RADARPILOT
GE3064, CHARTRADAR and
GE3065, MULTIPILOT
Item No.: ED3051G542 Revision: 02 (2005-09) Order No.: 390001631

This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Telefax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
e-mail:shipservice@sam-electronics.de
t_eu11_eti.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual List of Contents
List of Contents
List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4 Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6 Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.1 Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.3 Operating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4 Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.1 Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.3 User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.6 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.7 VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3 Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1.1 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.1.1.2 Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.2 Electronics Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1.4 Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2 Specific Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 3
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
List of Contents Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.5 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.5.1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.5.2 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.4 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.5.4.1 Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.5.4.2 Service Switch of the RDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.5.4.3 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.5.4.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.5.5 IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.5.7 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.5.8 Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.5.9 Interconnection Box VS3034G030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.5.9.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.5.9.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.5.9.3 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . 66
4.5.9.3.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.5.9.3.2 Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5.10 Analog Interface GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.5.10.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5.10.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5.10.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.5.11 COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.5.11.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.5.11.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.5.11.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.5.11.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.5.11.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.5.11.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.5.12 Operating Unit BD3027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.5.12.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.5.12.2 Trackball BD 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.5.12.3 Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.5.12.4 Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.5.12.5 Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.5.13 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.1.1 Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100) 86
5.1.2 Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100) . . . 88
5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.4.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.4.2 Installation and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
5.4.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.6 System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.6.1 Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.6.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.6.3 Service Log-in Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.8 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.8.1 Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.8.2 Map Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.8.3 Map Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.8.4 Track Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.8.5 Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.9 Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.9.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.9.2 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.9.3 Map Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.9.4 RDC Test Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.9.5 ARPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.10.1 Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.10.2 Determining the Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.11 Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.11.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.11.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.11.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.11.4 Configuration File Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.11.5 System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.11.6 System / Ship Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.11.7 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.11.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.11.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.11.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.11.8 Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander) . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.11.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.11.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.11.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.11.9 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.11.10 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.11.11 Planning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.11.12 Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
5.11.13 ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.11.14 VDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.12 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.12.1 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.12.1.1 Monitor Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.12.1.2 RDC Service and Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.12.1.3 Check RDC Alarm IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.12.1.4 Serial I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.12.1.5 Software Update (+PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.12.1.6 PCB Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.12.1.7 RKE Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.12.1.8 RKE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 5
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.1.9 Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

5.12.2 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.12.2.1 Setting-to-Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.12.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.12.2.3 Magnetron Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.12.2.4 Antenna Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.12.3 Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.12.4 NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.13 Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.14.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.14.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.14.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.14.4 Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.15 Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.15.1 Analog Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.15.2 RGB Buffer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6 Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.2.1 System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.2.2 System Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.2.6 Configure (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.2.7 Configure (Planning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.3 Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.3.1 COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.3.2 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.3.3 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7 Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8 Repair/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2 Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2.1 Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2.2 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2.3 Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.2.4 Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.2.5 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only) 183
8.2.6 The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System . . . . . . . . 183
8.2.6.1 Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100): . 184
8.2.6.2 Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100): . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.2.7 Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.2.8 Trackball Operation is Erratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.3 Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.3.1 System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.3.2 System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.4 Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
8.4.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

8.4.2 Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.4.3 Console Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.4.4 SCC C4 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.4.5 Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.4.6 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.4.7 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.5 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.6.1 Exchange of the Main Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.6.2 Exchange of the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.6.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.6.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.6.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.6.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
8.6.7 Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
8.6.8 Exchange of the IDE Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
8.6.9 Exchange of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.6.10 Exchange of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.6.11 Exchange of the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
8.6.12 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
8.6.13 Exchange of Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.6.14 Exchange of Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.6.14.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.6.14.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.8 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.8.1 Spare Part Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.8.2 Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.8.3 Spare Parts for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
9 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.2.1 Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.2.2 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.2.3 Performance Data of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.2.4 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.2.5 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.3 External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.1 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.1.1 Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.1.2 Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.2 COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.1 Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.1.1 Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.5 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.6 Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.1 System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 7
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
10.2 AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.3 System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11 Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12 Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13 Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig. 1-1 Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fig. 2-1 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 2-3 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2-4 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 2-5 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation . . . 34
Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation . . . . 35
Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 4-3 CAN bus concept and termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board) . 45
Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander) . . . . . . 45
Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 4-8 Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 4-10 RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 4-12 IDE memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 4-13 Example for a Graphics And Video Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 4-16 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 4-17 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 4-18 Power supply cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fig. 4-19 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 4-20 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 4-21 SH3014T203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 4-22 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 4-23 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 4-24 TTL plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 4-25 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 4-26 RS232 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 4-27 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 4-28 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 4-29 Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 4-31 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 5-3 Disconnection of the drive cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 5-4 Dismounting of the drive module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 5-5 Turning the brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 5-6 Interfaces for ship’s sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 5-7 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 5-8 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 5-9 System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 5-10 System Maintenance Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 9
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
List of Figures Technical Manual
Fig. 5-11 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Fig. 5-12 System fault list (present faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fig. 5-13 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 5-14 List of software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 5-15 Configure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 5-16 TRACKPILOT configuration manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 5-17 PMA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 5-18 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 6-4 System Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 6-14 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 6-15 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 6-16 COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 6-17 RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 6-18 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 6-19 Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fig. 6-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fig. 8-3 Unmounting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 12-1 Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 12-2 Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 12-3 Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 12-4 Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 12-5 Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig. 12-6 Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fig. 12-7 Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 12-8 Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 12-9 Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 12-10 Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 12-11 Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fig. 12-12 Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fig. 12-13 Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 12-14 Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 12-16 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fig. 12-17 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4 261
Fig. 12-18 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fig. 12-19 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4 263
Fig. 12-20 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Fig. 12-21 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fig. 12-22 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1 . 266
Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fig. 12-25 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fig. 12-26 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
10 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual List of Figures
Fig. 12-27 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7 . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fig. 12-28 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fig. 12-29 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7 . . . . . . 273
Fig. 12-30 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fig. 12-31 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fig. 13-1 Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 13-3 Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fig. 13-4 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fig. 13-5 23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fig. 13-6 23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fig. 13-7 23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fig. 13-8 C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 13-9 19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 13-10 19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fig. 13-11 19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fig. 13-12 C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fig. 13-13 SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fig. 13-19 SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 13-25 Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fig. 13-26 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 11
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
List of Figures Technical Manual
12 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations
This list also contains abbreviations which are not used in this manual but in additional documentation.
A
A/D Analog/Digital
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AGP Advanced Graphics Port
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
ATA Automatic Tracking Aid
AZS Azimuth Start
B
BSH Bundesamt für Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency of Germany)
C
CAN Controller Area Network
CD Centred Display
CRR Close Range Resolution
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CWL Construction Water Line
D
DMA Direct Memory Access
E
EPA Electronic Plotting Aid
ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System
F
FIFO First In First Out (Memory)
FTC Fast Time Constant => Rain (Rain Clutter)
G
GPS Global Positioning System
GVP Graphics and Video Processor
H
HF High Frequency
HM Head Marker
HSC High Speed Craft
HV High Voltage
I
IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
IMB Interface and Memory Board
ISA Industry Standard Architecture Bus
K
KBC Keyboard Controller
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 13
t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05
List of Abbreviations Technical Manual
M
MMI Man-Machine Interface
N
NACOS Navigation and Command System
NI NAVIGATION INTERFACE
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association
NOB Number of Bits
n.c. Not connected/normally closed (break contact)
n.o. Normally opened (make contact)
O
ONP 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with positive potential
ONN 24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with negative potential (no ground potential)
P
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCI Processor-Controlled Interswitch, current designation: Interswitch
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PMB Pentium Motherboard
PPI Plan Position Indicator
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
R
Rev. Revision (as-delivered status), see Section 1.2
RDC Radar Data Converter
RF Radio Frequency
RGB Red Green Blue
RKE Remote Keyboard Electronics
ROT Rate of Turn
RPM Revolutions per Minute
RSC Radar Scan Converter
S
SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SI Ship’s Interface = Interface Expander
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
STC Sensitivity Time Control => Sea (Sea Clutter)
T
TFT Thin Film Transistor
T/R Transmitter/Receiver
TCU Transmitter Control Unit
TM True Motion
TVA Trigger Video Azimuth (Combined Video)
V
VDR Voyage Data Recorder
14 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 1 General
Technical Manual 1.1 Software Releases
1 General
This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:

RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100
- Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box
- Operating Units
NOTE:
To avoid longwinded phrases, the MULTIPILOT 1100 and the RADARPILOT 1100 are named "radar" in
this manual. The names MULTIPILOT, CHARTRADAR and RADARPILOT are used when it is of interest.
1.1 Software Releases
As soon as important software updates can be delivered, they are mentioned in Section 7.
1.2 Hardware Versions
All pcb’s and units are labelled with a sticker which shows the revision (Rev.) and the print version (for
pcbs only). Modifications on a pcb or a unit cause a new revision which is marked by a figure (-, 01, 02,
03...). The numbering of the revision is continuous, even when a new print is used for a pcb. If no revision
is marked, the first revision number on the label is valid.
The print version of a pcb is marked by means of characters. The original version is marked with "-"; the
following versions are marked with A, B, C, ... . Sometimes it is possible to update pcbs with an older
print version to a higher revision, and so the print version is not a reliable characteristic for the revision
of a pcb.
Rev., marked by "X"

ztr1_139.jpg
Order No. Item No. of Serial No.

the complete
pcb with all
components
Fig. 1-1 Version label
The pcb’s are marked with their print version. The revision status is not recognizable.
ztr1_179.jpg
Item No. of the pcb itself, Print version

without any components
Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling
If an item has to be exchanged, the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Refer to Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 15
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1 General RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work Technical Manual
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work
SAM Electronics gives advice and recommendations for the arrangement of SAM Electronics equipment
and the installation sites. A prerequisite is that the necessary drawings of the ship should be made avail-
able in good time.
This advice and these recommendations are given on the basis of our up-to-date practical experience
and to the best of our knowledge. However, they are given without any commitment. As far as is permis-
sible, any liability on the part of SAM Electronics for resulting damage is expressly ruled out, regardless
of whether the damage is of a direct or indirect nature.
Unusual shipbuilding shapes, additions or superstructures as well as environmental influences can impair
the functioning of the equipment. We are, of course, willing to help the customer with optimizing solutions
subject to suitable commercial arrangements.
The customer is responsible for ensuring that SAM Electronics equipment is installed properly according
to our instructions and in compliance with the regulations issued by the relevant classification society and
national authorities.
1.4 Safety Warnings
WARNING
This unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe precautions for handling.
The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its
properties. Before a unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equipment, Order
No. 586-5011, must be used.
1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.
2. The potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a suitable
protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MΩ resistor which must not be removed.
3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the
discharge line is established.
4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are
supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,
stock No. 593-8099.
Boards and units that contain ESD-endangered semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown
above.
All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESD
equipment.
16 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 1 General
Technical Manual 1.4 Safety Warnings
DANGER
It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the
system before setting-to-work by a qualified technician.
The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of a
common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s
supply or the mains cable must be disconnected until
setting-to-work takes place.
If a synchro or a stepper is connected, dangerous voltages

might be present, even although all supplies to the radar
system are switched off.
Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for

several hours, even when they have been disconnected
from the supply voltage.
The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the

mains supply for the motor, and so dangerous voltages are
present, even when the switch is set to position 0.
WARNING
Pay attention to the regulations for the prevention of accidents.
DANGER
Even when the system is switched off, there might be a
dangerous voltage present on exposed contacts. Therefore,
before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the elec-
trical supply to all units is, and remains, disconnected from
the ship’s mains.
DANGER
If the Scanner is stationary because the system is switched
off or because the radar has been switched into stand-by
mode, then unless the man aloft switch is set to 0 the
Scanner might begin to rotate at any time.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 17
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1 General RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation Technical Manual
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation
DANGER
When the Scanner is rotating, there is a danger caused by
high frequency radiation. Do not connect the system to the
ship’s mains before setting-to-work by a qualified techni-
cian.
During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically

switched off with a delay of 30 s, before if the speed of the
Scanner continuously falls short of 50% of its nominal
speed. This function is disabled, if the service mode is acti-
vated (switch S1/8 on the RDC or S1/8 on the TCU)!
DANGER
Never look down into the open waveguide while the trans-
mitter is active. Therefore, before any work in the cabling
is done, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to the
unit is, and remains, disconnected from the ship’s mains.
There are no international standards concerning the danger caused by high frequency radiation of the
kind produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m² is
regarded as dangerous. In some countries, values over 10 W/m² are regarded as being not completely
safe.
The distances from the various antennas of the radar at which the radiation density is 100 W/m² and
10 W/m², respectively, are stated in the following table.
Distance
Scanner type Transceiver Radiation density Radiation density
100 W/m² 10 W/m²
NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 14 m
5 ft X-Band NG3028, 25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 21 m
NG3028, 25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 16 m
NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 7m
8 ft X-Band NG3028, 25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m
NG3028, 25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 9m
NG3029, 30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 13 m
14 ft S-Band
NG3029, 30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 7.8 m
1.6 Safety Switches
The safety switches are located inside and below the Gearbox/Transceiver. Refer to the technical manual
of the Gearbox/Transceiver for further information.
18 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 2 Overview
Technical Manual
2 Overview
The following drawing shows the structure of the radar system. It consists of 3 main groups of assem-
blies:
- The Indicator, consisting of the Display Electronics Unit, including the Monitor and the Operating Unit
(various versions available).
- The Transceiver, which can be installed in the Gearbox (Version A, "Transmitter Up") or at a
distance from the Gearbox in a housing of its own (Version B, "Transmitter Down").
- The Antenna Unit, consisting of the Gearbox and the Scanner.
5 ft X-Band 8 ft X-Band 14 ft S-Band
Gearbox/
Gearbox Gearbox Scanner
X-Band X-Band Gearbox
S-Band
Transceiver
X-Band X-Band S-Band Version A
Transceiver, Transceiver, Transceiver, (Transceiver mounted
12.5 kW 25 kW 30 kW in the Gearbox,
"Transmitter Up")
or
X-Band S-Band Version B

Transceiver, Transceiver, (Transceiver mounted
25 kW 30 kW in a bulkhead housing,
"Transmitter Down")
Gyro
Log
Position Display Electronics Unit
NMEA
AIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Log and Interconnection Box
Display Display
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit via optional Analog Interface GE 3062/64/65
COM-Expander VS 3034G030
ARPA EPA Audio Alarm Off, Alarm (reserve)
Dead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm,
Interconnection Interconnection Chart Alarm, System Alarm
Box Box Interswitch (PCI)
CHARTPILOT (via Ethernet LAN)
Slave Monitor via Indicator Electronics
optional Video Buffer/RGB Buffer as console version, desktop
version or shipyard kit.
250 mm 23.1" 340 mm

19”
PPI, Monitor PPI,
Monitor Monitors/
TFT TFT
Operating Units
Radar TRACKPILOT
Keyboard Keyboard
(optional) (optional)
BD 3027
ztr1_007.eps
BD 3027
Trackball
BD 3028
Fig. 2-1 System overview
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 19
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2 Overview RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
2.1 Nomenclature Technical Manual
2.1 Nomenclature
The nomenclature shows the versions of Gearbox, Transceiver and Indicator for the Radar 1100 series.
RADARPILOT 1102 / ARPA - 2A8X

CHARTRADAR
MULTIPILOT
Options: Antenna Size:

0 = no options 5 X = 5 ft X-Band
1 = TRACKPILOT 8 X = 8 ft X-Band
Display Size (TFT Monitors): 14S = 14 ft S-Band
PPI Size Transceiver Position:
2 = 250 mm 19.0" A = Gearbox (up)
9 = 340 mm 23.1" B = Bulkhead (down)
Plotting Aid: Transceiver Type:
ztr1_166.eps
AIS/EPA = manual (not for MULTIPILOT) 1 = 12.5 kW X-Band

AIS/ARPA = automatic 2 = 25 kW X-Band
3 = 30 kW S-Band
Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature
20 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.2 Indicator
2.2 Indicator
2.2.1 Versions
The Indicator consists of the Display Electronics Unit GE3062 (RADARPILOT 1100), GE3064 (CHAR-
TRADAR 1100) or GE3065 (MULTIPILOT 1100), the Interconnection Box VS3034, the Monitor AZ30XX,
the Operating Unit with the Trackball BD3028 and the optional Keyboards BD3027. Depending on the
version, the Display Electronics Unit is mounted together with the Interconnection Box in a console
housing or it is mounted separately. The Interconnection Box can be mounted below the Display Elec-
tronics Unit or separated from it (stand-alone version with cover).
The Display Electronics Unit for the RADARPILOT is available in two different electronic versions:
- ARPA (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to
IEC 60872-2)
- On customer request, it is possible to configure the radar as True Motion (TM) radar (contains
EPA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-3)
The Display Electronics Unit for the MULTIPILOT always has the ARPA functionality (corresponding to
IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-2)
The following mechanical versions are available:
TFT shipyard installation kit:
- Chassis-monitor with mounting kit
- Operating Unit (consists of the Trackball or a holder plate equipped with Keyboards / Trackball
corresponding to the order with additional shielding plate)
- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a sepa-
rate Interconnection Box.
Desktop version prepared for horizontal surfaces:
- Desktop housing with integrated monitor with or without Operating Unit
- Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a sepa-
rate Interconnection Box.
Console versions:
- 19" TFT version completely mounted in a 550 mm console
- 19"/23.1" TFT version completely mounted in a 700 mm console
The following monitors are available:
Radar (PPI) size 250 mm 340 mm
Resolution 1280x1024 1280x1024 (960)
23.1" AZ3063G050
TFT Monitor type 19" AZ3068G051 or
AZ3069G040
It is possible to connect up to three slave monitors via the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 or further slave
monitors via an additional Video Buffer SH3023. The required technical specifications for these slave
monitors depend on the settings of the Graphics And Video Processor. Ask the SAM Electronics
customer support for suitable combinations. A slave monitor can get damaged if it is driven with the
wrong parameters.
Depending on the installation location, the Display Electronics Unit can be installed as a package with the
Interconnection Box (e.g. in the console housings) or both units separately. In both versions, the housings
of the units stay the same. The Interconnection Box is given an additional cover as a stand-alone unit.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 21
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.2 Indicator Technical Manual
ztr1_013.jpg
Fig. 2-3 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled
2.2.2 Interfaces
Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors

The Display Electronics Unit provides four serial interfaces (RS422), which are compatible with
IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2. For a dual installation, these interfaces are available for other purposes,
such as redundancy or extension, because the data of the sensor inputs of one radar are available for
the other radars of a system, too.
By means of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216, the four interfaces can be adapted also to RS232,
RS422, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY). The type of each interface can be defined by means of plug-
in interface cards.
The interfaces are available at the Interconnection Box. See Section 4.5.9 on page 64 for further infor-
mation.
Additional Sensor Interfaces

It is possible to install an Analog Interface or a COM Expander (it is not possible to install both in the
same Interconnection Box) in the Interconnection Box.
- Analog Interface for log/gyro, AIS
The Analog Interface GE3044G207 offers a gyro interface (AC/DC), a pulse log interface and a
serial interface for the connection of an AIS. It is mounted inside the Interconnection Box. For further
information, see Section 4.5.10 on page 68.
- COM Expander with serial interfaces
The COM Expander GE3044G210 offers five serial interfaces (inputs/outputs) which can be adapted
to RS232, RS422, RS485, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY) or for the connection e.g. of an AIS,
a unit with an NMEA interface or a bridge alarm system. For further information, see Section 4.5.12
on page 88.
22 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.2 Indicator
Interswitch
If the system exceeds the size of a dual installation, an Interswitch (former called PCI) must be integrated
to switch the video signal (TVA) of the chosen Transceiver to the Indicator actually being operated.
The Interswitch is mounted in a separate housing (GE3023).
RGB Buffer/Video Switch

As a further option, an RGB Buffer, e.g. for the connection of up to three slave monitors, can be installed.
It is mounted in the Interconnection Box. Alternatively, it is possible to connect more slave monitors via
the 5-Channel Video Switch SH3023.
Remote Keyboard Electronics

If slave Operating Units are needed or in case of a distant installation, the so-called RKE is needed. A
separate technical manual exists for the RKE.
Alarm Outputs
For the connection of an external (central) alarm system, there are potential-free switch contacts (inputs
and outputs).
2.2.3 Operating Units
The Operating Unit is divided into three sections. To operate the radar functions, only the Trackball unit
is necessary. To improve the handling, an additional Radar Keyboard is available. For the integration into
a NACOS system, the Operating Unit is extended by addition of the Trackpilot Keyboard, which includes
the steering joystick.
ztr1_017.jpg
Fig. 2-4 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards
For service purposes, the Radar Keyboard and/or the Trackpilot Keyboard can be replaced by a standard
PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector. By means of this keyboard, it is possible to enter numeric values
and to parameterize the system in a more convenient way.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 23
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment Technical Manual
2.2.4 Monitors
The monitors are not covered by this manual. For further information, see the technical manuals
for the monitor.
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment
For the CHARTRADAR 1100, see Section 2.5.
RADAR equipment:
The following combinations with SAM Electronics equipment are possible/not possible:
- The RADAR 9xxx transmitter or transmitters of older radar series cannot be used with a 1100 series
Display Electronics Unit.
- The RADAR 9xxx Display Electronics Unit or display electronics of older radar series cannot be
used with a 1100 series Display Electronics Unit.
- The RADAR 1000 transmitter can be used with the 1100 series Display Electronics Unit if the hard-
ware components are of a specified revision status (see the technical documentation of the antenna
(GR3017/GR3018) and Transceiver (NG3028/NG3029)).
NACOS equipment:
- Connection of a TRACKPILOT 1100 or ENGINE INTERFACE
- The TRACKPILOT 9401 cannot be connected.
The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT 1100 cannot be integrated in the NACOS xx-2, xx-3
and xx-4 systems.
2.4 Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100
A CHARTPILOT 1100 must be integrated in a system with a MULTIPILOT 1100, because the chart main-
tenance can be performed only at a CHARTPILOT.
1)
Navigation and Command System
24 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100
2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100
The hardware of the CHARTRADAR 1100 is the same as the hardware of the RADARPILOT 1100, but
it is necessary to enable the CHARTRADAR software functionalities by means of an authorization code.
Either the radar can be delivered as a CHARTRADAR 1100 ex works or a RADARPILOT 1100 can be
updated if the prerequisites of Section 2.5.2 are fulfilled.
2.5.1 Functionalities
- Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

- Conning Display
2.5.2 Prerequisites
- The radar must be licensed by means of an authorization code ex works, or the authorization code
must be ordered from the manufacturer. See Section 5 for further information.
- Ethernet network adapter to connect the CHARTRADAR by means of the Ethernet LAN to a
CHARTPILOT 1100.
- At least one CHARTPILOT 1100 must be installed in the system.
- Vector chart data installed at the CHARTPILOT
- The conning display should be activated only, if a TRACKPILOT and an ENGINE INTERFACE are
connected, because without these systems there is not enough data available to be displayed.
2.5.3 User Chart Objects
User Chart Objects which have been generated on a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 can be displayed on
the radar without the CHARTRADAR licensing. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT must be configured
as a connected planning system (see Section 5.11.5 on page 114) and the CHARTPILOT must be config-
ured as a chartserver (see the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 25
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2.6 AIS Technical Manual
2.6 AIS
It is possible to connect an AIS electronics unit to the radar. For further information, see the operating
manual of the radar and the technical manual of the UAIS Electronics Unit DEBEG 3400. If other AIS
systems are used, the minimum demands concerning functionality and interfacing corresponding to the
regulations are fulfilled.
SAM SAM
VHF GPS
Antenna Antenna
Ship's
sensor data
RS 422
Display Display 1
Sensor Input
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit 2 )
3 Channels *
RS 422
Interconnection CAN Bus Interconnection UAIS

Ship's
sensor data Box Ship's Box RS 422 Electronics Unit
sensor data with Analog Interface
Prim. Display
or COM Expander
Port
or
Ethernet LAN Ethernet
LAN 24 VDC
)
*
Gyro: HDT, ROT
Speedlog (bottom-track): VBW
Position Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM
CHARTPILOT 1100
All data are transferred with a
repetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1)
except of DTM (0.1 Hz)
ztr1_601.eps
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR
MULTIPILOT 1100 /MULTIPILOT 1100
Fig. 2-5 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 is connected to the Interconnection Box. The ship’s sensors are connected to
the radars/MULTIPILOTs. The sensor data are transferred from the radar(s) to the AIS (in dual or multiple
installations, from two radars or MULTIPILOTs as redundancy, if possible).
The repetition interval of the ship’s sensor data is set automatically if the Indicator’s serial interface is
configured as the AIS Navigation Data interface.
It is also possible to connect the AIS by means of the Ethernet LAN. All CHARTPILOT systems receive
the AIS data via the Ethernet LAN. If the AIS Electronics Unit is not connected to the LAN, only the acti-
vated targets can be displayed at the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS Electronics Unit is connected to the LAN,
the complete AIS functionality is also available at the CHARTPILOT.
2.7 VDR DEBEG 4300
The VDR DEBEG 4300 can be connected to the Ethernet LAN. For the configuration of the 1100 series
system which is necessary for the connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300, see Section 5.5 on page 97.
For the configuration/setting-to-work of the VDR, see the documentation of the VDR.
26 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 3 Installation Recommendations
Technical Manual 3.1 General Recommendations
3 Installation Recommendations
3.1 General Recommendations
3.1.1 Cables
Cable types, cable data, maximum cable length, special instructions for cable laying and connection
details are defined in the Cabling Documents of the corresponding equipment (consisting of schematic
diagram, remarks, cable list and connection diagram).
Interface connections should be discussed and agreed with SAM Electronics.
In order to ensure proper functioning of the equipment, the cable types should be selected according to
the cable lists.
In general, the following points must be taken into account:
- For the cables inside the units (cabinets), an extra length of 1 metre is necessary at each end. If
the height of the unit exceeds 0.5 metre, an extension by 1 m plus the height of the cabinet is neces-
sary.
- The cables must be marked by the electrician at both ends with the cable numbers corresponding
to the SAM Electronics cabling documents.
- Where necessary, particular cable glands - marked with letters and/or numbers - are assigned to
the cables.
The identification letters and numbers are stated in the connection diagrams; they are either fixed to
the unit or can be seen from the outline drawings (...BZ or ...MB).
- All cables should be kept as short as possible, especially coaxial cables to minimize attenuation of
signal.
- All connectors installed outdoors (e.g. on coaxial cables) should be waterproof by design to protect
against water penetration into the cable.
- Coaxial cables should be installed in separate signal cable channels/tubes and at least 10 cm away
from power supply cables. Crossing of cables should be done at right angles (90°). Coaxial cables
should not be exposed to sharp bends, which may lead to change the characteristic impedance of
the cable. The minimum bend radius should be 5 times the cable’s outside diameter.
- It must be ensured that all cables - including their screens - are passed into the units in contin-
uous lengths and are not terminated before reaching the destination equipment. This is not valid
for the use of cable glands with grounding inserts.
The cables must be prepared by means of a wire (0.5...1.0 mm², length: 800 mm) as shown in Figure
3-1. The wire has to be connected at the shielding terminal contact.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 27
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3 Installation Recommendations RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
3.1 General Recommendations Technical Manual
1. 2.
ztr1_153.jpg
ztr1_196.jpg
3. 4.
ztr1_197.jpg
ztr1_198.jpg
Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings
- When putting the cables into cable glands with grounding inserts, the procedure described must
be followed (see Figure 3-2).
Coaxial cables must be grounded at the cable gland or cable entry of the
housing and at the suitable terminal.
The internal diameter of the sealing ring (1) must be adjusted to the cable diameter. The screen
braiding (2) must be pushed over the anti-cone (3) of the grounding insert. Then the cone (4)
must be put into position. The screen foil (5) must be protected against tearing by means of
28 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
insulating tape (6) before it is unwound. Form a kind of wire from the unwound part of the foil
and crimp a connector (7) to the end. The gland must be screwed tight. If the gland is screwed
tight with too much strength, it can happen that the screen braiding is cut.
ztr_176.jpg
7 6 5 4 2 3 1
as short as
possible
ztr_180.jpg ztr_178.jpg
Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts
- With the use of cable glands without grounding inserts, the screen braiding inside the unit must
be plaited to form a "pigtail", terminated by a cable terminal, and connected to the prescribed
grounding terminal. It must be ensured that the grounding lead is kept as short as possible.
- In the case of a unit whose cable inlet consists of a hole with brackets attached on the inside
and outside, the cable must be dressed as shown in Figure 3-3.
- With multicore cables, it is useful to strip down and lace the single wires according to the terminal
sequence.
- Receptacle-type cable terminals included in the delivery must be crimped to the connecting leads
by means of a suitable pair of AMP pliers. If a terminal board of a unit has no tabs for the above-
mentioned receptacles, other suitable cable terminals must be used.
- Existing cable grippers in the units must be used.
- All cable connections must be carefully checked after completion of the cable work and all cable
screens must be grounded via the shortest possible connections - if not stated otherwise in the
Cabling Documents/Connection Diagram.
- All cables must be secured by means of suitable clamps (pull-relief) before entering the units.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 29
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
- When soldering stripped coaxial cables to connectors, it must be ensured that the central
conductor and the screening do not produce a short circuit. A short-circuit check after installation is
advisable.
- It must be ensured that cables do not block any moving parts within a unit.
- Stuffing tubes exposed to the open air must, without fail, be sealed with compound.
- Power leads must be protected by "slow-blow" fuses according to their cross section.
Brackets
Metal clamp inside Installation cables

FMGCH, FMKHC, MGCH etc.
35+5 Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing;

contact with the brackets via metal clamp
Metal clamp outside

ztr1_072.gif
Fig. 3-3 Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets
3.1.1.1 Maximum Cable Length
Coaxial Cable for TVA Signal

The maximum length of the TVA cable must not exceed 300 m. For a length of more than 150 m, see
the description of the IF-Amplifier in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
CAN Bus
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 0 must not exceed a length of 500 m between the termination resistors
when a cable FMGCH or FMKHC is used.
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 1 must not exceed a length of 100 m.
Ethernet LAN
The Ethernet LAN thin wire cabling must not exceed a length of 185 m.
Video Cable (RGB Buffer)

The video cable (VGA) which is connected to the RGB Buffer must not exceed a length of 50 m.
30 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.1.1.2 Cable Sets
Cable sets for the standard-cables of X/S-Band installations are no longer available. The cables can be
ordered in the required length by means of the following order numbers:
Cable type Order No. of the individual items

Coaxial Cable
Draka 1.0/4.8 AF FRNC 300006082
(former TELASS 100 PE) (535-1708)
Cable (8-core)
FMKHC 4x2x0.75 300005306
(former FMGCH) (535-4461)
3.1.2 Electronics Units
Dimensions, weights, spaces required for service and maintenance and special installation instructions
are stated in the outline drawings and installation drawings of the corresponding unit. In general, the
following points also apply:
- The useful life of the components of all electronics units (display units, pulse generators, Trans-
ceivers etc.) generally decreases with increasing ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to
install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there are no such facilities - e.g. deckhouse or space
near or below the water line - these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a
suitable temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside these units.
- With most electronic units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing.
The cooling must not be impaired by partial covering of the unit as a result of insulation (if any) of
the room (the wall on which the casing is mounted), or by installation of the unit in a confined
cabinet.
Furthermore, the distance from the ceiling and the floor or from a unit situated underneath must be
at least 500 mm.
- For service purposes, a power socket (AC 220/230 V) and adequate lighting are necessary in the
vicinity of each electronics unit.
- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic protec-
tion distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the "wing control console" -
protected against the weather - if they do not at least comply with the enclosure type IP 56. In order
to avoid misting of the viewing screen, 25 ... 50 W console-heating (power depending on the volume)
is recommended.
- When selecting the site of a unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered according to
the notes in the cabling documents (remarks, cable list).
- The accessibility for maintenance and service (stated in the outline drawings or installation draw-
ings) must be considered.
- The impairment of a digital read-out or a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must
be avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or venetian blinds.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 31
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
- Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must
be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).
- When a unit is being installed, the base, floor or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it is
flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such twisting
would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by means of
spacing-washers.
- The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire
used should have a cross-sectional area of at least 6 mm.
Aboard fibreglass (GRP) vessels, a "grounding network" with a high conductance - taking into
consideration the working frequencies of the other equipment - must be provided in order to achieve
satisfactory EMC (electromagnetic compatibility).
- In the interests of safety during maintaining or servicing, the shipyard should provide a common
isolating switch or circuit breaker (in conjunction with a contactor, if necessary) for all intercon-
nected equipment.
- Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be exam-
ined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment is too
late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.
- The equipment should never be switched on by the electricians who did the installation work
- not even just for a moment - never!
This is a job for the authorized SAM Electronics service engineer.
- After hand-over of the equipment in good operating condition to the customer, the Installation
Report (Annex of the Warranty Certificate) should be filled in completely and then forwarded to SAM
Electronics as proof of such fulfilment. It is important that these requirements be fulfilled in order to
avoid the risk of losing the warranty.
3.1.3 Indicator
All radar indicators in the wheel house must be installed in such a way that the radar observer faces in
the forward direction of the ship.
In the case of ferries and special-purpose vessels, the authorities (e.g. the BSH) may permit exceptions
to this rule.
3.1.4 Monitors
General
1. The SAM Electronics radar and navigation equipment monitors have been type-tested and are
approved only in the original as-delivered condition in accordance with IMO Resolution A.694(17);
they fulfil the test and approval conditions as per IEC 60945 and DIN EN 60945 ("B - protected from
the weather").
2. Changes in the monitors, such as the removal of casings or the closing of existing ventilation open-
ings, or improper mounting of the monitors, such as installation in a different casing, will lead to loss
of approval; furthermore, our warranty for any resulting damage or malfunctions will become null and
void.
32 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3. Please note: Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating
temperature of 55°C, continuous operation of all electronic components should, if possible, take
place at ambient temperatures of only 25°C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low
service costs.
Installation, Mounting of Monitors

1. Most monitors are intended for various methods of installation or mounting (mounting on the
pedestal/panel, desktop or fixed mounting, or bracket mounting to allow tilting for service purposes);
for details, please see the relevant installation drawings.
When monitors are mounted side by side or next to a panel wall (for example), the tilting bracket for
service purposes is mandatory.
2. Existing vibration or shock absorbers must not be removed.
3. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the electronic components. The air
inlet and outlet openings marked in the installation drawings must definitely be kept clear; coverings
which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to excess temperature. This point should already be borne
in mind when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows, venti-
lation, ...).
5. The space stated in the installation drawings as being necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for
the operating procedures and for maintenance, must be provided.
6. If the pushbuttons of the monitor are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination (e.g. goose-
neck light) is required for navigational use.
7. The installation of additional active electronic components in the units or in the pedestals is not
permissible.
8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings. Attention
must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service work.
Ergonomics
1. For observation of the screens both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a monitor
inclination of about 30° to 40° (mounting of the monitors on a surface inclined at an angle of about
30° to 40°) has turned out to be favourable. This does not apply to monitors in bridge wing panels.
For this purpose, as well as for the operating areas, the rules of the classification society concerned
must in all cases be incorporated into the planning.
2. The brightness of monitors is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means (negatively
inclined window surfaces, venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring of the deck-
head, ...).
3. Monitors in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or bulkhead/
deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the monitor are not
directed into the observer's viewing direction.
4. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment that
require approval (by optical effects, "aids" of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 33
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.2 Specific Recommendations Technical Manual
3.2 Specific Recommendations
3.2.1 Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables
The cables between the Display Electronics Unit, the Interconnection Box and the monitor are prefabri-
cated. They are marked with numbers which correspond to the numbers of the connectors. See also
Section 4.5.3.3 on page 51.
3.2.2 Recommendations Concerning the Ship’s Sensors / Redundancy
The RDC offers 4 RS422 interfaces for ship’s sensors which can be converted to RS232, RS485, TTL
and TTY by means of plug-in pcbs on the Interconnection Board. It is advisable to use the interfaces as
shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5, which describes the connection of the ship’s sensors to the Intercon-
nection Board in a single installation and in a dual installation.
Single Installation
Display Electronics Unit
Gyro Interface 1
Log Interface 2
Interconnection
Board
Position Sensor 1 Interface 3
ztr1_118.eps
Fig. 3-4 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation
34 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 3.2 Specific Recommendations
Dual Installation
Display Electronics Unit 1
Output 1
Gyro *) Output 2 Interface 1
Output 1
Log *) Output 2 Interface 2
Interconnection
Board
Other Sensors Interface 4
*)
with two electrically Display Electronics Unit 2
separated outputs
Redundancy
Interface 1
Redundancy
Interface 2
Interconnection
Board
ztr1_637.eps
Other Sensors Interface 4
Fig. 3-5 Typical connection of ship’s sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation
For further information, see the cabling diagrams in Section 12 and the description of the RDC in Section
4.5.4, page 53.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 35
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
For ship’s sensors with Analog Interfaces, the Analog Interface must be used. The system can also
contain two Analog Interfaces for redundancy purposes.
Single Installation without Redundancy
Position Sensor 1 Output Connection Board
RDC pcb
Display Electronics Unit

Nav Bus
Gyro Gyro interface
Log Log interface

ztr1_162.eps
AIS Analog
Interface
Fig. 3-6 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy
Dual Installation with Redundancy
Output 1 Interconnection Board Interconnection Board

Position Sensor 1*) Output 2
*)
RDC pcb RDC pcb
with two electrically
separated outputs
Display Electronics Unit Display Electronics Unit

Nav Bus
Gyro Gyro interface Gyro interface
Log Log interface Log interface

*)
Analog AIS Analog
Interface 1 Interface 2
ztr1_638.eps
*)
Connect to Analog Interface 2
The AIS must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces
Fig. 3-7 Typical connection of ship’s sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy
36 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 3.2 Specific Recommendations
3.2.3 Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400
Connection via RS422 Interface:

In a single installation, an Analog Interface or a COM Expander must be provided to connect the AIS
system. If a second Analog Interface exists (usually in dual or multiple installations for redundancy
connection of an analog gyro), the AIS must be connected to the Analog Interface 2 (usually at Indi-
cator No. 2).
The AIS electronics unit must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces!
In dual or multiple installations with an analog gyro it is recommended that two Analog Interfaces be
used to achieve redundancy of the ship’s sensors (see Section 3.2.2).
Connection via Ethernet LAN:

The AIS can be connected via Ethernet LAN, so that it is not necessary to install an Analog Interface.
3.2.4 Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface
ATTENTION
Setting the compass input to serial IEC 61162-1 data
(HDT message with 4800 Baud and 1 Hz repetition rate) will
result in degradation of stabilization smoothness. There-
fore such compass installations should only be used for
stabilization purposes of EPA radars.
For any installation which is required to meet the IEC 60872-1 (ARPA) or
IEC 60872-2 (ATA) specification, the serial data of the gyro compass
must conform to the IEC 61162-2 standard. The interface shall provide a
heading data update rate of at least 20 Hz for normal radar and 40 Hz for
HSC radar.
ATTENTION (compass systems with synchro transmission)

Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degra-
dation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore
this setting should not be used where:
- the radar installation has to meet the IMO/IEC Radar Performance

Standards
- type approval certification is required
- the ARPA option is fitted.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 37
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
3.2.5 Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems
It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate to
the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.
- When using a planning system, position coordinates obtained from a chart with a datum deviating
from WGS 84 can be converted to WGS 84 map and track data.
- The only position receivers that may be connected to the radar system or NACOS system are those
that output the position values in the geographical reference system WGS84 via an interface as per
IEC 61162-1 1).
- If the radar is installed in conjunction with a navigation system (NACOS/TRACKPILOT), see the
appropriate manuals.
1)
This part of IEC 61162 is closely aligned with NMEA 0183 Version 2.3 dated March 1, 1998
38 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 4 Functional Description
Technical Manual 4.1 Block Diagram
4 Functional Description
4.1 Block Diagram
The radar system can be extended to up to five MULTIPILOT or RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100

units. If there are more than two Display Electronics Units or Transceivers in one system, it is necessary
to use an Interswitch in a separate housing to switch the radar videos (TVA signals). The "power on"
concept stays the same.
The optional Interswitch and the Analog Interface are permanently connected to the ship’s mains.
SAM
SAM
Gearbox
Gearbox
Transceiver
Transceiver (Version A/B) with power supply
(Version A/B) with power supply and relay
and relay
1-ph / 3-ph
1-ph / 3-ph Ship's Mains
Ship's Mains
CAN 1, Nav Bus CH1...5 CAN 0 CAN 1, Nav Bus
Ship’s
CAN 0, Radar Bus CAN 0, Radar Bus
Data Ship´s
AIS TVA 1 out TVA 1 out
Data
Gyro TVA 2 out Gyro TVA 2 out
Log TVA in Log TVA
CAN 0 CAN 0
GPS Power On Display Electronics CH1 Interswitch GPS Power On Display Electronics
NMEA GE3062/64/65 ... out ≥ 3 Radars NMEA GE3062/64/65
CH5 (optional) Mains
Mains
with optional with optional
Analog Interface or Analog Interface or
COM-Expander COM-Expander
RGB
RGB RGB
Power- Buffer Power-
On (optional) On
Signal Signal
RGB RGB
Mains
Monitor Monitor
AZ 30xx AZ 30xx
Mains
To Slave-
Monitor
Data (PS/2)
Data (PS/2)
ztr1_005.eps
Operating Unit
Operating Unit
BD3027
BD3027
Fig. 4-1 Block diagram with wiring concept
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 39
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4 Functional Description RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
4.2 "Power On" Concept Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept
Transceiver Electronics Unit 1 Transceiver Electronics Unit 2
Mains Mains
Input Unit Input Unit
Ship's mains Ship's mains
24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN) 24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)
Monitor Monitor
Power Power
switch switch
Ship's mains Ship's Mains
TB13 TB10 TB5 TB13 TB10 TB5
T1 TB4 Ship's mains T1 TB4 Ship's mains

Interconnection Interconnection
CR1 Box CR1 Box
24V ON/OFF 24V ON/OFF

from/to (ONP/ONN) (ONP/ONN)
other
units
TB3 K1 TB3 K1
TB11 TB11
Ship's mains Ship's mains
Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2

ztr1_060.eps
24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)
Fig. 4-2 "Power on" concept
The system is switched on by means of the mains power switch of the master monitor. The master
monitor is supplied with power by the Interconnection Box. If the mains switch of the monitor is switched
to position "On", the mains supply is led back to the transformer T1 in the Interconnection Box. The trans-
former and a rectifier generate the voltage 24V ON/OFF. In contrast to the name, the voltage is about
30...36 VDC without load. In the circuit diagrams, the two wires of 24V ON/OFF are also called ONP and
ONN. The signal is not connected to a ground potential. It is not permissible to use ONN as a GND line
or to use ONP as a power supply line. 24V ON/OFF is connected as an output to TB3 and switches the
relay K1 in the Interconnection Box. K1 switches the mains power supply of the Display Electronics Unit
and of an optional slave monitor. If there are more radars or MULTIPILOTs in the system, the 24V ON/
OFF signals of these units are connected as an input on TB3, too. The signals are connected by strip
40 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.2 "Power On" Concept
conductors, so that all radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system get the signal if only one radar has been
switched on. This is necessary to enable the user to obtain the radar video of a second system whose
Indicator has not been switched on. The remote video inputs and outputs are delivered by the Display
Electronics Unit.
The 24V ON/OFF signal is led to all Transceivers of a system. At Transceivers NG3028/NG3029, it is
connected to TB 3 of the connection board GR3017G200 and switches the mains supply relay for the
mains input of the mains input unit NG3028G204. In version A, the unit NG3028G204 is situated in the
Gearbox. In version B it is situated in the bulkhead housing.
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started as described above. If the BIOS settings are
incorrect, the radar might not start.
NOTE:
If the Display Electronics Unit is supplied by a UPS, the Transceiver Electronics Unit must not be
connected to TB5. The mains supply for the Transceiver must be connected independently from the UPS.
Only if the capacity of the UPS is sufficient for the supply of the Transceiver and the motor (in 1-ph
systems), can TB5 be used.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 41
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination Technical Manual
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
Transceiver 1 Transceiver 2
TP53 CAN0 TP53 CAN0

1/2 termination 1/2 termination
TCU TCU
J2 J2
J1 J1
TB3 Connection Board TB3 Connection Board
max. length of CAN 0

500 m between the
CAN0 termination resistors CAN0
J7 J5 (CAN1) J7 J5 (CAN1)
Analog Inter- Analog Inter-
Interface connection Interface connection
Board Board
CAN1 CAN1
term. TB3 term. TB3
TP78 TP78
1/2 1/2
Box J1 Box J1
CAN0 & CAN1 CAN1

CAN0 & CAN1 CAN0 & CAN1 Interface Expander
(optional)
CAN0 termination CAN0 termination

TP161 1/2 TP161 1/2
RDC RDC
CAN1 termination CAN1 termination
TP162 1/2 TP162 1/2
ztr1_125.eps
Display Electronics Unit 1 Display Electronics Unit 2
This symbol shows an available connector for the termination of a CAN

bus in the drawing above. Do not connect jumpers to all termination
connectors. Each CAN bus must be terminated by means of only 2
ztr1_175.eps
jumpers. See the following descriptions to choose the correct units for the
termination. Never leave out the termination.
Fig. 4-3 CAN bus concept and termination
WARNING
If the termination is not performed, the system might work

unreliably!
42 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
Figure 4-3 shows the principle of the wiring of the CAN bus system. The example shows a dual installa-
tion, version A. The termination resistors must only be implemented at the beginning and at the
end of a CAN line. For further examples, see the technotes. The CAN wires should be as short as
possible.
Advice for the Termination of the CAN Buses

1. Determine the beginning and the end of a CAN bus.
2. Terminate the CAN bus only at the beginning and at the end.
3. The CAN bus (CAN 1) is also connected to an optional trackpilot. It is possible that the TRACK-
PILOT is connected at the beginning or the end of a CAN bus wiring.
CAN0
CAN0 is also called the "radar bus". By means of the radar bus, the system is controlled; all orders and
parameters are sent via the radar bus.
For the example on page 42, CAN0 should be terminated at TP53 1/2 of both Transceivers.
If a direct CAN0 connection between the Transceiver electronics units has been performed, the termina-
tion must be performed at the TCU (TP53 1/2) of the last Transceiver in the CAN0 line and at TP161 1/
2 of the last RDC of one Display Electronics Unit in the CAN0 line. If an Interswitch (PCI) is used in a
separate housing, it might be necessary to terminate CAN0 at the Interswitch pcb.
CAN1
CAN1 is also called the "navigation bus" or "nav bus". The data of the ship’s sensors, such as position
data, speed data and gyro data, are sent via the nav bus.
For the example on page 42, CAN1 should be terminated at both RDCs’ TP162 1/2.
WARNING
If the cable connection between J5 of the Interconnection
Board and J7 of the Analog Interface or of the COM
Expander is not present (e.g. no Analog Interface is
installed), the CAN bus output terminals of TB3 have no
function.
In this case, the following pins of the Interconnection
Board must be short-circuited by means of jumpers:
J5 1/2
J5 3/4
J5 5/6
J5 7/8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 43
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces Technical Manual
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces
Single Talker/Single Listener

In single talker / single listener systems via the Interconnection Board, it is not necessary to terminate the
RS422 interface, because the interface is always terminated at the IMB.
In single talker/single listener systems via the COM Expander, it is necessary to terminate the RS422
interface at TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. See page 78 for a description of TP3.
RS422 connected to interconnection board

Interconnection Board Indicator
Ship's sensor RS422
IMB
Internal
termination
RS422 connected to COM expander

COM Expander Indicator
Ship's sensor RS422 GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_649.eps
Jumpers must be set to TP3
Fig. 4-4 Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection
Single Talker/Multi Listener

Single talker/multi listener connections result from sensors which are connected to two Indicators (redun-
dancy). The serial connection must be terminated at the Indicator with the longest distance to the ship’s
sensor.
For a RS422 connection via the Interconnection Board, the termination is given by the IMB, so that the
termination at the Indicator with the shorter distance must be deactivated. This must be performed by
means of an additional plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. The pcb GE3044G218 must be connected to
the Interconnection Board and all jumpers on TP3 must be removed. See page 78 for a description of
TP3.
44 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces
Interconnection Board Indicator 1

Ship's Sensor RS422 GE3044G218
TP3
IMB
All jumpers from TP3
must be removed internal
termination
IMB
ztr1_650.eps
internal
termination
Fig. 4-5 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board)
For a RS422 connection via the COM Expander, the termination resistor must be deactivated at the Indi-
cator which is closer to the ship’s sensor (all jumpers must be removed from TP3 of the plug-in adapter
pcb GE3044G218). It must be activated at the Indicator which is farther away from the ship’s sensor
(jumpers must be set to TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). See page 78 for a description of
TP3.
COM Expander Indicator 1

Ship's Sensor RS422 GE3044G218
TP3
Jumpers must be removed

from TP3
Com Expander Indicator 2
GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_651.eps
Fig. 4-6 Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 45
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces Technical Manual
Separate Serial Interfaces

If the sensor has two separate outputs, then they must be used to install two single talker / single listener
connections and it is not necessary to modify the termination.
RS422 IMB
Ship's Sensor
RS422 internal
termination
COM Expander Indicator 2

GE3044G218
TP3
ztr1_652.eps
46 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 4.5 Display Electronics Unit
4.5 Display Electronics Unit
4.5.1 System
LOG Radar alarm TVA1 to R

ztr1_001.eps
Serial Gyro Target alarm TVA2 Monitor G

I/O Position Dead man alarm trigger B
NMEA Chart alarm TVA1 out
CAN0 Audio alarm ack. (Remote video)
CAN1 Reserve
Buzzer
RDC Graphics & Video

Processor
(GVP)
Reset
Monitor control (COM1)
Speaker
Debug port (COM2)
Parallel port
LAN
Trackball (PS/2)
Keyboard (PS/2)
1 2 Par. PS/2 PS/2

Power Supply
(ATX)
COM
AGP slot CPU Module
PCI Pentium
On/Off
ISA
Mains
RAM
Diskette drive
ATX motherboard IDE1 RADARPILOT: IDE flash module to IDE1

IDE2 MULTIPILOT: Hard-disk/DVD drive to IDE1
IDE flash module to IDE2
Fig. 4-7 Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit
The block diagram does not show the correct order of the pcb’s. This order depends on the type of moth-
erboard which is used in the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 4.5.3 for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 47
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5 Display Electronics Unit Technical Manual
The Display Electronics Unit contains the following components:

- Pentium motherboard (PMB)
- Radar Data Converter (RDC)
- IDE memory module
- Graphics and Video Processor (GVP)
- Power supply
- Interconnection Board
- LAN Network Adapter
- RGB Buffer (optional)
- Hard Disk drive, DVD-ROM drive for MULTIPILOT, diskette drive
The monitors are not dealt with in this manual. Separate technical manuals are available for all types
which can be serviced. The monitors can be connected to the Display Electronics Unit or to the RGB
Buffer.
The Display Electronics Unit has to process the radar video and to act as the interface to the user
together with the Operating Unit and the monitor. The functions are described in detail in the following
chapters.
4.5.2 Housing
The components of the Display Electronics Unit are mounted in a metal housing.
48 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3 Pentium Motherboard (PMB)
CAUTION
The motherboard shown and described below is only an example
(version DFI CA64). The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with
a different motherboard to keep up with technical progress.
PCI slots
ISA slot Main processor Power supply
(not used) BIOS Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 AGP slot Memory banks with fan connector
1 2 3 4 5
ztr1_015.jpg
Power On, LED, Lock, Reset, IDE connectors Floppy connector

Speaker connectors
Fig. 4-8 Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set in the factory.
WARNING
If different motherboards can be used, see Section 7, R e v i -
s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information about prerequisites.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 49
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3.1 Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards
The main processor is the Pentium processor on the motherboard. The motherboard is a PC board of the
ATX standard with sockets for CPU, BIOS, RAM, ISA cards and PCI cards.
The interfaces of the motherboard are shown in the block diagram in Figure 4-7. An example of the posi-
tion of the connectors is shown in Figure 4-9. The location and the number of connectors depend on the
version of the motherboard. For the sequence of the pcb’s in the PCI slots, see Section 4.5.3.2 on page
50.
Types of Motherboards
The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with different motherboards to keep up with technical
progress. The different versions of the motherboards can be recognized by means of the number of PCI/
ISA slots and some labels of the manufacturer. Some types of motherboards have an onboard sound
card. In this case, the sound option must be disabled in the BIOS settings (see Section 5.14) and, in case
of exchange, the covers must be removed from the openings for the sound card connectors in the elec-
tronics unit’s housing. At present, the following type of motherboard is used:
Type of motherboard Number of Number of Position of the manufacturer’s label

ISA slots PCI slots
DFI CA64 1 5 - On the housing of the parallel interface
Connection of the Buzzer

The speaker output of the motherboard is connected to E20/1 of the RDC. The position of the connector
on the motherboard depends on the version of the motherboard. Usually, the motherboard pcb is
inscribed accordingly. See Figure 4-8 for an example. Only one contact of the connector is used. If the
cable is connected to the wrong connector, the buzzer does not work.
4.5.3.2 Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboard’s Slot
The pcb’s which are described in the following sections have to be plugged in at a defined PCI slot. It is
not permissible to change the position of the pcb’s on the motherboard. If a pcb has been plugged in at
the wrong PCI slot, then unforeseen faults will probably occur.
CAUTION
For the slot numbers, see Figure 4-8 on page 49. The
numbers printed on the motherboard pcb may be different
and are not valid. Start to count from the ISA slots onwards
in direction of the processor, as shown in Figure 4-8. The
number of ISA and PCI slots depends on the motherboard
type. The position of the pcbs must NOT be changed!
PCI Slot No. 1)
PCB DFI CA64

Ethernet module 2
GE3044G219 (RDC) 5
1) The slot numbers printed on the pcb are not valid! See Figure 4-8 on page
49 for the correct sequence.
50 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.3.3 Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit
4 5 9
ztr1_078.jpg
1 2 3 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fig. 4-9 Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
No. of Function
Contact
1 Mains connector
Voltage selector (115/230 V). If this switch is not provided, the power supply unit adapts automati-
2 cally to the mains supply voltage.
3 Mains switch (Important: The system must be switched on / off by means of the monitor mains
switch! This switch should be used for service purposes only.)
4 Supply connector for the Operating Unit (= 5)
Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit or Interconnection Board GE3044G216 if
5 plug-in pcbs are used (= 4). This connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted
additionally (GE3044G052, order No. 2776376) if necessary.
6 Trackball connector
7 Keyboard connector
8 USB connector, not used
9 Parallel port, not used
10 Serial port, for monitor OSD data (depending on monitor type), to J3 of the Interconnection Box
11 Serial port, not used
12 1) VGA connector for Monitor or to RGB Buffer in the Interconnection Box or the 5-Channel Video
Switch
13 1) VGA connector for RDC input (TVA1, TVA2, TVA1 out), to J4 of the Interconnection Box
1)
14 RDC connector, to J1 of the Interconnection Box
15 1)
Ethernet module (optional)
1) The positions of the connectors depend on the motherboard type. See Section 4.5.3.2.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 51
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
The connectors for the supply of power to the keyboard and the plug-in adapter
pcbs are similar. The 12 V supply is not needed.
If plug-in pcbs for the interface conversion are mounted, the Interconnection
Board needs a separate power supply cable, which must be connected at one of
these connectors. The second connector is currently not delivered ex works. It
must be mounted additionally (kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if neces-
ztr1_101.jpg
sary.
12 V 5V
52 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.4 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219
DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi- Switch No. DIP Function

cator Number Switch
On=closed=0; off=open=1 4 3 2 1 S1/5...8 ON OFF
Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On Boot from diskette drive
Boot from IDE (the software update
Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off 5 memory module routine is started while
(default) booting).
Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On
6 Monitor resolution Monitor resolution
Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off 1024x768 1280x1024
Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On Monitor frequency
7 Monitor frequency 60 Hz
All other settings are not admissible 72 Hz
Normal operation
8 (default) Service Mode On 1)
1)
See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.
CAN Bus Termination Settings for the Different Monitor Types

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1 Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7
TP161 1/2 Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus termi-
nated AZ3069G040 Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off
TP162 1/2 No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not
terminated AZ3063G04x/5x Off Off AZ3056G04x Off Off
See also Section 4.3 on page 42. AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off
AZ3065G040 Off Off
Speaker TP161
E15 E20 E2 TP151TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6 S1 DS8 DS10 DS2 E18 DS12 E17
DS5 DS7 E10/ DS9 DS1 DS3 DS11 DS13
1 1 E11 1
1 1 1 1 1 8 1 E1 1
E4
1 1 E28 1 E12 1
E14
1 1
1 E25
1 E16
J2 1 1
1 E26
1
1 E27
1
ztr1_623.jpg
Termination of Motherboard
J4 E19 TP103 serial interface 4 E5 E3, ext. Reset contact
ztr1_011.jpg
TP102 serial interface 3

E5/2
E5/1
E20/1
Fig. 4-10 RDC pcb
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 53
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Watchdog
If an error is detected in the electronics units‘ components, a red screen is generated and by means of
the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the motherboard is reset. In case of such a reset,
the system reboots. If the reset cable is not connected, the red screen is displayed permanently to indi-
cate the error, because the reset cannot be performed.
Connectors/Jumpers/Test Pins
E1, E4, E10, E11, E12, E14, E16, E25, E26, E27, E28 are for the manufacturer‘s use only. It is not
permissible to connect cables or jumpers to one of these contacts. Jumpers which have been set in the
factory must not be removed!
E2 Function
1 Not used
(1: speaker signal, 2,3: not connected, 4: GND
2 Output for an internal speaker)
3
4
E3 Function
1 Not used (a zero-potential touch contact can be connected as a reset button)
2
E5 Function
1 Watchdog functionality of the RDC. Reset output, zero potential. Must be connected to the reset
input of the Display Electronics Unit‘s motherboard.
2 For motherboard DFI CA64: E5/1 to the left pin of the reset input, E5/2 to the right pin.
E15 Function
1 AGND (analog GND)
3 TVA signal test point (TVA1, TVA2 or TVA test signal). Trigger=+2 V, Video=-2 V, AZIMUTH-
START=-4 V, AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, see Figure 4-11 on page 57.
E17 Function
1 Trigger signal (TTL high pulse)
2 Synchronization start signal (TTL low pulse)
3 Synchronization data (TTL)
E18 Function
1 GND
E19 Function
1 AGND (analog GND)
54 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
E20 Function
1...4 Speaker input, must be connected to the speaker output of the motherboard. Only pin 1 is used.
TP100...103 Function
1 Termination of the serial interfaces.
Jumper on 1/2 = termination with 120 Ω (default)
No jumper on 1/2 = no termination
2 TP100 = serial interface 1, TP101 = serial interface 2,
TP102 = serial interface 3, TP103 = serial interface 4
TP151 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = alarm acknowledge input (Interconnection Board TB2 13/14) suitable for 20 mA
current loop (optocoupler driver input)
2 Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
3
4
TP152 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB2 15/16) suitable for 20 mA current loop
(optocoupler driver input)
2 Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
This input can be used to turn the headmarker by 180° by means of an external contact. This
3 function must be configured in the System Maintenance Manager (Configure). If the external
4 contact is closed, the headmarker is turned. This function must not be used in NACOS systems.
LEDs
Function
While system booting During operation
DS1 green ON ON = DSP2 selftest failed
DS1 red OFF ON = DSP1 selftest failed
DS2 green ON Toggle = DSP2 host communication failure
DS2 red OFF Toggle = DSP1 PCI overrun
DS3 green ON Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP2)
DS3 red OFF Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP1)
Function
ON OFF
DS4 green Interrupt in process Interrupt finished
UART 1
DS4 red Interrupt in process Interrupt finished
UART 0
DS5 green
UART 3 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

UART 2
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 55
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
DS6 green
CAN1 Interrupt in process Interrupt finished

CAN0
DS7 green Toggle on every interrupt entry
DS7 red Not used
Function
DS8 green On = PCI DMA running
DS8 red On = PCI DMA inactive
DS9 green On = DSPs are not held
DS9 red On = DSPs are held
DS10 green On = ARPA DMA running
DS10 red On = ARPA DMA inactive
Function
DS11 green No function
DS11 red Syndat signal failure (TVA signal)
DS12 green Manufacturer‘s use
DS12 red Trigger signal failure (TVA signal)
DS13 green Manufacturer‘s use
DS13 red Synstart signal failure (TVA signal)
4.5.4.1 Alarm Contacts
The alarm outputs are:

1. Radar alarm
2. Dead man alarm trigger
3. Target Alarm (formerly ARPA Alarm)
4. Chart alarm
The alarm inputs are:
1. Audio Alarm Acknowledge
2. Not used
The outputs are relay contacts. The maximum load of the contacts is 24 V/0.3 A. The inputs can be
switched by means of TP151 and TP152 to zero potential inputs (switch, relays) or suitable for 20 mA
current loop (optocoupler driver input).
For further information on the alarms, see the operating instructions.
56 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.4.2 Service Switch of the RDC
The service switch of the RDC (S1/8) also activates the service functions of the TCU, so that it is not
necessary to set the service switch S1/8 of the TCU additionally (see the technical manual of the Gear-
boxes/Transceivers). If the service switch of the TCU is activated, the service mode functions of the RDC
are not available, so that it is advisable to activate the service mode by means of the service switch of
the RDC.
If the service mode is activated by means of the DIP switch S1/8, the following functions are available:
- Acquire targets without gyro data (to test ARPA functions).
- Acquire targets without Radar Bus data.
- Display the radar video although the Radar Bus is not working correctly.
- Activation of a check mode during the start. The sequential start of the processes is displayed. When
an error crops up, the booting routine is stopped immediately and the faulty process can be recog-
nized.
- Access to Service Menus without password.
- Activation of the TCU service mode with the following functions:
- If the Scanner stops turning, the Transceiver is not switched off.
- If the magnetron current exceeds or falls short of its limits, the Transceiver is not switched off.
- If a communication time-out occurs in the communication with the master Indicator, the Trans-
ceiver is not switched off.
The maintenance menus can be entered and used without the use of the service switch. The switch offers
the additional functionalities described above, especially for the setting-to-work phase.
NOTES:
- As soon as setting-to-work, maintenance or service work has been finished, the service mode must
be switched off!
- The service mode must not be active during normal operation!
- If the service switch is activated during normal operation, a frozen radar video might be displayed at
the Indicator if the Transceiver is switched off!
- If the service mode is activated, the Transceiver is not switched off automatically when the Scanner
stops turning!
4.5.4.3 Adjustments
U 2 ms / 1 ms / 0.5 ms
+2 V/75 Ohm
100 µs
5 µs 5 µs
Trigger Trigger t
Video ~15 µs
-2 V/75 Ohm
Azimuth data
LSB MSB
ztr1_024.ceps
-4 V/75 Ohm
Azimuth
start
Fig. 4-11 The TVA signal
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 57
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Figure 4-11 shows an idealized diagram of the TVA signal. In the Radar 1100 series, the adjustments
can be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software. The values are measured
and set automatically. For further information, see Section 5.12.1 on page 140.
4.5.4.4 Functional Description
Interfaces
The RDC contains inputs for the connected sensors and outputs for alarms.
4 serial interfaces RS422 for the standard sensors, 2 CAN bus interfaces (Radar Bus and Nav Bus), 4
alarm outputs (incl. 1 dead man alarm) and 2 alarm inputs are available.
It is advisable to use the serial interfaces as shown in Section 3.2.2, page 34 and in the cabling docu-
ments.
Radar Video Processing

The RDC unit transfers the processed radar video via the PCI bus with a frame rate of at least 15 Hz to
the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP).
The DSP software includes the functions Range Scale, North-Up Stabilization and True Motion Stabilisa-
tion.
The video processing includes gain adjustment, Rain (FTC), Auto Rain, Interference Rejection, Direct
Video, Video STC, Video Enhancement (if Clean Sweep is switched on) and turn-by-turn correlation.
ARPA Functions
The RDC is not responsible for the complete ARPA functionality. The ARPA processing (acquisition,
tracking, zone control, display of tracked targets) is done by the main processor on the motherboard
(PMB).
The RDC prepares the combined video signal and transfers it via the PCI bus to the main processor.
Memory
The RDC has a battery buffered memory which saves the radar status and configuration data, for
example the boot mode of the MULTIPILOT or the current operator settings during the power down of
the system, so that it can be started again with the same settings. The operating system, the application
software, the configuration data and data such as the map and track data are stored in the IDE memory
module and/or the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT.
58 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.5 IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001)
Master/slave switch
ztr1_625.jpg
Fig. 4-12 IDE memory module
In the RADARPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE1 connector of the
motherboard. In the MULTIPILOTPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE2
connector of the motherboard (the hard-disk/DVD drive is connected to the IDE1 connector).
It contains the operating system and the application software of the radar. The operating system and the
application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In case of a hard-disk failure, the
MULTIPILOT can be booted from the IDE memory module and operates as a standard radar. See
Section 8.2.6 on page 183 for detailed information.
The configuration parameters are always saved in the IDE memory module.
Different versions of the IDE memory module will be used in accordance with the technical progress. The
modules have a switch or a jumper for the master/slave mode selection. They must always be configured
as master.
The power supply for the module is the same as for a hard-disk drive.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 59
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.6 Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213

ztr1_014.jpg
Fig. 4-13 Example for a Graphics And Video Processor
The Graphics And Video Processor is a standard video adapter card with the following specifications:
- AGP bus interface
- 8 MB video RAM
- Video output with VGA connector, synchronization coupled to green signal or separate signals
- QNX-qualified
Depending on technical progress it is possible, that different versions of the Graphics And Video Proc-
essor are used.
The main processor’s software controls the overlay of the MMI graphics, the line graphics of the PPI area,
the ARPA/plot graphics and the radar video (generated by the RDC unit), by the use of "intelligent“ copy
commands to the graphics processor of the GVP unit.
The function Centred Display and the calculation of the afterglow lines of the trails and targets are
performed by software through the main processor and the GVP.
No settings or adjustments have to be performed at the pcb.
60 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.7 Power Supply
The power supply for the Display Electronics Unit is

a standard PC power supply corresponding to the
ATX specification. It supplies the following volt-
ages:
- +3.3 V
- +5 V
- +12 V
- -12 V
- -5 V
- +5 V stand-by
ztr1_022.jpg
Power Supply
NOTE
The power supply is equipped with a protective against tottering
contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, the
power supply does not start and it must be switched off for 5...10 s until
it can be switched on again.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 61
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.8 Ethernet Module
The Ethernet network adapter is needed for the inte-

gration of the radar into a NACOS system. It is not
needed for a single, dual or multiple radar installa-
T
tion but it can be used to connect a DEBEG AIS or

VDR system.
The Ethernet module is plugged into the mother-
board slot. The wiring must be done following Figure
4-14 with 50 Ω coaxial cable (for example inside the
enclosures, RG 58, for ship’s cabling RG 213 / U,
see cabling diagrams). The network is a 10 Mbit
network with Thin Ethernet wiring.
Y-plugs are delivered instead of the T-plugs
formerly used. The BNC Y-plugs must be connected
directly into the Ethernet module. It is not admissible
to connect the Y-plug and the network adapter by
means of a coaxial cable.
The proper termination with a 50 Ω BNC-termination
plug at both ends of the Ethernet line is very impor-
tant.
It is not permissible to use cable with a character-
istic impedance different from 50 Ω.
No settings or adjustments have to be made on the
Ethernet module.
ztr1_071.eps
Fig. 4-14 Principle of wiring for LAN Network
NOTE:
If the Ethernet module is not used, it must be removed from the electronics unit. It must be
replaced by a slot cover with the order No. 5582688.
62 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Figure 4-15 shows the various TRACKPILOT Electronics Units or

possibilities for connecting the LAN RADAR/MULTIPILOT/CHARTPILOT Electronics Units Interconnection Units
Ethernet. It is not admissible to
connect RG213/U coaxial cable RG58 RG213
directly to the Ethernet module.
The cabling has to be converted into
T
RG58C/U by means of the adapter

bracket in the interconnection unit
and the RG58C/U coaxial cable
which must be used between the
adapter bracket and the Y-plug on
RG58 RG213
the LAN network adapter pcb. Direct
wiring with RG58C/U cable is
possible if the cables are routed
inside the console housings.
RG58 RG213
RG58 RG213
ztr1_161.eps
Fig. 4-15 LAN Ethernet wiring of a quadruple system
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 63
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.9 Interconnection Box VS3034G030
The Interconnection Box provides the terminals

for the connection of the ship’s cables and for the
internal wiring to components of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit.
The Interconnection Box contains also compo-
nents for power supply and the system’s power
switch. The pcb GE3044G216 offers four inter-
faces which can be adapted to 20 mA current loop
(TTY), TTL, RS422 or RS232 by means of plug-in
pcbs.
zt1r_016.jpg
If the Interconnection Box is mounted below the

Display Electronics Unit. The optional RGB Buffer
and Analog Interface can be mounted in the Inter-
connection Box. Suitable bolts are provided. Interconnection Box with RGB Buffer and Analog Interface
The main signals which are connected via the Interconnection Box are:
- TVA video (TVA1 in and TVA2 in)
- TVA1 out (remote video)
- Serial interfaces (ship’s sensors, AIS)
- 2 CAN buses
- Alarm signals (input and acknowledge)
- Mains supply
- Power on/off switch signals
4.5.9.1 Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box
RGB Buffer
J2 J3 J4 J5 connectors, see
RGB IN RGB OUT RGB OUT RGB OUT Section 4.5.13
zt1r_081.jpg
J4, TVA to RDC J3, monitor OSD data J2, monitor OSD data J1, sensor
to display el. unit to monitor signals to RDC
Fig. 4-16 Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box
64 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.9.2 Interconnection Board GE3044G216
TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function SB = Solder Bridges break = normally closed (n.c.)
19 = TB3/5 The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN These 5 solder bridges must be opened, make = normally opened (n.o.)
18 = TB3/5 the RDC. See the RDC description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
17 = TB3/5 technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
Double End Ferry: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
15, 16 closed = AFT TB18 Function 11 CAN0_A (IN) power supply cable GE3050G020 must
15, 16 opened = FWD For Remote Keyboard Electronics 10 CAN0_B (IN) be used (J9). See also TP11. TB5 Function
Audio Alarm Ack.: 6 CAN_KBC GND 9 CAN1_A (IN) 1 L1 spare
14 Alarm Ack. M 5 CAN_KBC GND 8 CAN1_B (IN) TB18, J100, J8, TP10 2 N spare
13 Alarm Ack. P 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 7 CAN0_A (OUT) These connectors and testpins are 3 PE spare
Chart Alarm: 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 6 CAN0_B (OUT) needed for the connection of a Remote
12 AL_out4 make 2 CAN_KBC B in <- 5 CAN_GND Keyboard Electronics. See the corre- TB6 Function
11 AL_out4 centre 1 CAN_KBC A in <- 4 CAN1_A (OUT) sponding technical manual of the RKE 1 L1 to interf. expander
10 AL_out4 break 3 CAN1_B (OUT) for further information. 2 N to interf. expander
Target Alarm: 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 3 PE to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 24V ON/OFF ONP Position of the RKE pcb,
9 AL_out3 make IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus mounting by means of 4 bolts. TB4 Function
8 AL_out3 centre are identical. Ship’s mains
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 in
Dead Man Alarm Trig: J5 2 N in
TP10 1 3 PE in
6 AL_out2 make 1
5 AL_out2 centre 1 J7 Function
4 AL_out2 break 1
1 Mains to Analog Interface
Radar Alarm: SB J8 SB SB 1 L1
3 AL_out1 make F2 1
2 AL_out1 centre 1 2 N
1 AL_out1 break 1 3 PE
F1 TB10 Function
J5 CAUTION Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 1
If the Analog Interface 1 L1 out, to monitor
is not connected, the pcb 4 pcb 3 pcb 2 F3 2 N out, to monitor
following jumpers must DS1 1 3 PE out, to monitor
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN bus: TB11 Function
- J5 1/2 J91 Plug-in pcb 1 DS2 1 L1 out, displ. el.
- J5 3/4 1 2 N out, displ. el.
K1
SB
- J5 5/6 3 PE out, displ. el.

- J5 7/8 F5 TB13 Function
TB1 Function 1 1 1 F4 1 L1 in, switched
Ship’s sensors RS422 TB1 TB2 TB3 Drillings for the by monitor
20 GND4 LAN-BNC adapter T1 230 V 2 N in, monitor
19 TXD4- 3 PE in, monitor
18 TXD4+ 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 J9 115 V
17 RXD4- TP11 1 J100 S1
16 RXD4+ 1 LED Function
1 DS1 is lit when mains is
15 GND3
14 TXD3- switched on at the monitor of
Drillings for the RGB Buffer this radar.
13 TXD3+
12 RXD3- DS2 is lit when the DC
11 RXD3+ voltage is available from the
10 GND2 transformer/rectifier.
9 TXD2- J6
8 TXD2+
Drillings for the Video Fuses
Selector SH3023G222 F1 System’s Mains
7 RXD2-
6 RXD2+ Fuse
5 GND1 F2 System’s
4 TXD1- J4 J3 J2 J1 Mains fuse
F3 Mains fuse monitor
ztr1_613.jpg
3 TXD1+
2 RXD1- F4 Mains T1
1 RXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF signal
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232, See also page 190.
see Section 4.5.9.3 on
page 66.
J4 Function J3 Function J1 Function
TB17 Function to El. Unit (RDC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (RDC) 22 AL_out2 centre 44 VGND1
1/2 TVA1 out 1 TVA1 1 n.c. 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1- 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
3/4 Screen 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 centre 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 COM1_DTR 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
TB16 Function 5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
1/2 TVA2 in 6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 centre Ack. N
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2- 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
3/4 Screen 30 +5 V
8 GND 8 COM1_CTS 8 TXD2+
31 TXD4+ TP11
TB15 Function 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- Jumper on 1/2 = default
10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
1/2 TVA1 in J2 Function 33 GND4 Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
11 11 RXD3+ if the power supply cable
12 Serial interface to monitor 12 RXD3- 34 GND
3/4 Screen 35 LKAP (Beeper +) GE3050G020 is connected
13 1 LKAP (Beeper +) 13 TXD3+ (plug-in pcbs)
14 2 RXD 14 TXD3- 36 LKAM (Beeper -)
J9, J91 Function 15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
Supply input for plug-in 4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
pcbs 5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
1 Vcc J6 6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
2 GND Connector for the 7 RTS 19 AL_out1 centre 41 CAN_GND
3 Vcc RGB Buffer, See 8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
4 PE Section 4.5.13. 9 LKAM (Beeper -) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
Fig. 4-17 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 65
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.9.3 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216
The ship’s sensors are connected to the terminals TB1 of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216. The
plug-in pcbs can be used together with the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 to convert the four serial
interfaces to TTL, 20 mA current loop (TTY) and RS232 for the connection of ship’s sensors with inter-
faces different from RS422. It is not necessary to use the RS422 plug-in pcb. See page 44 for further
information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
The plug-in pcbs must be fixed by means of a bolt and a nut.
4.5.9.3.1 Connection of Ship’s Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1
TTY (20 mA current

Plug- RS422 TTL loop) RS232
in pcb
No. TB1 No plug-in pcb or GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214
GE3044G218
20 GND4 GND GND GND
19 TxD4 - GND TxD4 - GND
4 18 TxD4 + TxD4 TxD4 + TxD4
17 RxD4 - GND RxD4 - GND
16 RxD4 + RxD4 RxD4 + RxD4
15 GND3 GND GND GND
10 GND2 GND GND GND
5 GND1 GND GND GND
NOTE:
1. If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, the additional connector must be mounted by means of
the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198). See page 67 for further information.
2. If a plug-in adapter pcb is used, the five solder bridges on the Interconnection
Board below the plug-in adapter pcb must be opened by means of a sharp
knife.
66 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
3. Usually, it is not necessary to use a plug-in adapter pcb for a ship’s sensor with RS422 interface. If
the impedance of the interface is too low, the plug-in pcb can be used to have the termination resis-
tors of the plug-in pcb available, which can be activated by means of TP3.
The pcbs are the same which must be used for the COM Expander. See the following sections for a
description:
Section 4.5.11.2.1, T T L P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 1 on page 76.
Section 4.5.11.2.2, 2 0 m A C u r r e n t L o o p ( T T Y ) P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 2 on page 77.
Section 4.5.11.2.3, R S 2 3 2 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 4 on page 77.
Section 4.5.11.2.4, R S 4 2 2 / R S 4 8 5 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 8 on page 78.
4.5.9.3.2 Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035)
If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, an additional power supply cable is necessary. Currently the
Electronics Unit is delivered with only one power supply connector at the rear (see Section 4.5.3.3 on
page 51). In this case, the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198) must be use. It is
included in the standard scope of delivery for new systems, if required.
The connector with cable (GE3044G052) must be mounted in the Display Electronics Unit. The cable
must be connected to an unused plug of the Power Supply Unit. If no suitable plug is available, the
adapter (976296-33) must be used. The cable GE3050G020 must be connected between the new
installed connector at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit and J9 of the Interconnection Board.
Furthermore, the jumper TP11 must be set to 2/3.
If a Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 is installed in the Interconnection Box (in case of a Remote
Keyboard Electronics), it is not necessary to install the Modification Kit. See the Technical Manual of the
Remote Keyboard Electronics for further information..
TP11
ztr1_640.jpg
ztr1_641.jpg
Fig. 4-18 Power supply cable GE3050G020
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 67
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10 Analog Interface GE3044G207
For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.
TB Function TB Function TP78 Termination

10 AIS RxD - (Input -) 40 Alarm out 1, make Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
11 AIS RxD + (Input +) 41 Alarm out 1, centre No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
12 do not connect! 42 Alarm out 1, break
13 do not connect! 43 Alarm out 2, make TP99 Addresses
14 AIS TxD - (Output -) 44 Alarm out 2, centre Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)
15 AIS TxD + (Output +) 45 Alarm out 2, break Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (for a second
16 AIS GND Analog Interface)
(≥Rev 03 only) TB Function
30 ST1 status input for gyro
J1 RS422 Interface 32 ST2 status input for log
Connector for SH3014G203, 33 ST2 status input for log
RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)
TP5 TP1 TP74 TP75 TP90 TP70
TB52, PE
1 1 TB51, N F1
TB10 TB40 TB1 1 TB50, L1
TB11 TB41 TB2
TB12 1 1
TB42 TB3
TB13 TB43 TB4
TB14 TB44 TB5
TB15 TB45 TB6
1 1
TB16 TB7
TB30 TB8 1
TB31
TB25 TB32
TB24 TB33
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20 1
ztr1_080.jpg
1 7
TB Function TB Function J7 TP2

25 Common (stepper) 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts) DS34 DS35 DS7
24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common 2 Log BT (bottom track)
(synchro) 3 Log WT (water track) DS36 DS33 DS37
23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro) 4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
22 Gyro T 5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
21 Gyro S 6 Log VX (speed)
20 Gyro R 7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift)) break = normally closed (n.c.)
8 Log GND make = normally opened (n.o.)
Fig. 4-19 Analog Interface, ≥Rev. 03
68 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Connectors / Jumpers / Test Pins

TP1 Function
1 1 = VCC, 2 = LM, 3 = SPA_LOG
Set jumper on 1/2 to supply log outputs (zero potential) with voltage.
2 Set jumper on 2/3 to supply log outputs with external voltage.
3
TP2 Function
1 VCC, jumper must be set (default ex works).
2
TP5 Function
1 Jumper on 2/3 = ST1 (status input 1) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = ST1 signal as zero potential contact
2
3
4
5 Jumper on 6/7 = ST2 (status input 2) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA
Jumper on 5/6 and 7/8 = ST2 signal as zero potential contact
6
7
8
TP70 Function
1 n.c.
2 n.c.
3 n.c.
4 GND for serial interface, for manufacturer’s use
5 TXD, manufacturer’s use
6 RXD, manufacturer’s use
7 Activate bootstrap loader, active low, for manufacturer’s use
8 GND for bootstrap loader, manufacturer’s use
TP90 Function
1 RESET IN
2 GND
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 69
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
J7 Function
1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
5 5/6 connected
6
7 7/8 connected
8
LEDs
Function
DS7 green C167 controller initialization finished
Flashing at 0.25 Hz = normal operation (only second Analog Interface)
DS7 red Flashing at 1 Hz = normal operation (active Analog Interface, if two Analog Interfaces installed)
Flashing at 5 Hz = at least one error is active (highest priority)
DS33 green Gyro signal: DS34 = R, DS35 = S, DS33 = T, the LEDs show the direction and the polarity of the
incoming signal. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave. 1-2 LEDs must be on. If no LEDs
DS33 red or all of them are on, the incoming signal is not correct. See Section 5.11.8 for the configuration
of the analog gyro system and Figure 4-20 on page 71 for the connection of a gyro and a log.
DS34 green
DS34 red
DS35 green
DS35 red
DS36 green Reference voltage for DC stepper with half wave. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS36 red
DS37 green Reference voltage for AC gyro. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS37 red
Fuse
Fuse
F1 For the fuses, see page 190.
70 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
LOG
1-axis log connection to Radar
Analog Interface 2-Axis Log connection to Radar Analog Interface
TB TB
8 GND (common) 8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed) 6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (Water Track)
2 BT (Bottom Track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
1.) DC Stepper System Analog Interface 2.) DC stepper system Analog Interface
( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35
+ TB are flashing green - TB are flashing red
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
25 common 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”
3.) DC stepper system Analog Interface 4.) DC Stepper System Analog Interface
( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red TB are flashing green
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
+ 25 common - 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”
In DC stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semi- AC System 50 Hz Analog Interface
conductors. See the following example: AC System 60 Hz TB
23 REF 1
DC stepper system Analog Interface 20 R
( common - high ) 21 S
TB 22 T
20 R 24 REF 2 (reference
21 S common)
22 T
25 common
+(-) Gyro (Synchro)
ztr1_124.eps
Gyro
Fig. 4-20 Connection of log and gyro
The interfaces have to be configured by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section
5.11.8 on page 127 for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 71
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Functional Description
The RDC is equipped with 4 serial interfaces for the connection of the ship’s navigation sensors. If no
sensors (gyro/log) with serial outputs are available, an interface extension like an Analog Interface must
be used. Two extension units (Analog Interface or COM Expander) can be connected for redundancy
purposes. For the correct installation, see the description of the jumper settings.
The AIS interface (TB10...16, J1) is available from Rev. 03 on.
The interfaces for an analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and a pulse log are described in Section 9.3,
E x t e r n a l I n t e r f a c e s on page 204.
If two Analog Interfaces are used in one system, they must be addressed by means of TP99.
4.5.10.1 Analog Gyro
By the detection of the inputs R,S and T, every change in the gyro state can be recognized. The detected
bit combination is coded in Gray Code. The direction of the turn can be calculated by means of a compar-
ison with the value measured before. The measured difference of bearing is added or subtracted to/from
a defined start value. The typical resolution (changeable by parameterization) is 1/6°.
The actual gyro value is written to the CAN bus (Nav Bus) as a 16 bit item of datum. If the value does
not change, it is transmitted to the CAN bus every 300 ms. New values are transmitted at least every
20 ms.
Gyro sensors whose R,S,T detection is synchronized by a reference signal have a reference timeout
control.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
4.5.10.2 Pulse Log
The ship’s speed can be processed from the pulse log signal. The Analog Interface measures the time
between two rising edges of the signal. By means of the formula v = s/t (t = measured time, s = distance
per pulse (parameter)) the speed can be calculated.
Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
Input Function
XPM X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
can be configured in the maintenance menus.
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
YPM can be configured in the maintenance menus.
Bottom track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
BT configured in the maintenance menus.
WT Water track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
configured in the maintenance menus.
External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
ST2 input by jumper settings.
72 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.10.3 AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface
This assembly is used for signal matching (hardware) to input-signals complying with the RS422
standard. An integrated circuit is used which converts the input signal to TTL level. It can be inserted in
Analog Interfaces ≥Rev. 03.
This assembly processes signals in accordance with the RS422 standard for the connection of the
Primary Display Port of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit.
S1 Output Signal
Position 1 With handshake
Position 2 Without handshake
In the normal case, set position 2 - without handshake. The inputs are terminated by R1, R2 with 270 Ω.
1 Pin 1, 2:
not connected
4 Pin 3, 4:
Default is no jumper on 3/4. Set a jumper on 3/4
1 to connect the ground of the signal source and
Standard = 2 the ground of the Display Electronics Unit. See
Figure 4-22.
z_tr1_151.jpg
S1
Fig. 4-21 SH3014T203
A
TTL TTL
RS - 422
B GND
43
Output Input
+5V +5V
A A
Logic "1" Logic "0" 400 mV

2 V min
B B
0 0
z_si_013.eps
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop

Mark
Fig. 4-22 RS422 signals
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 73
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11 COM Expander GE3044G210
TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22

Manufacturer‘s use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers, and do
TB1...5 Function not remove jumpers which have been set in the factory
Sensor interface, TB7 Function
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
TP23 Termination
1 RxD + 2 Alarm out 1 centre Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
2 RxD - 3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed) No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
3 TxD + 4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)
4 TxD - 5 Alarm out 2 centre (not used) TB8 Mains supply
5 GND 6 Alarm out 2 break (not used) 1 PE
for all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1. The relays are switched on if the pcb is working! 2 N
3 L1
TP12 TP13
1 TP11 1 1
2 1 1
1 TB8 2
1 3
Plug-in pcb 4
2 2 TB7 3
4
TB3 3 TB4 3 5
4 4 6 F1
5 5 TP21 1
1 1 1 1
2 2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3 TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
TB2 3 TB5 3
4 4
5 5
1
2 1
TB1 3 2
TB6
4 3
5 4
ztr1_624.jpg
ON 8 S1
1 1 1
DS1 DS2 DS3 8 1
TB6 Function
1 Digital input 1 (+)
2 Digital input 1 (-)
3 Digital input 2 (+) S1 ON
DS4 DS5 DS6 S1 Function
1 OFF = COM Expander 1
TP41 Function ON = COM Expander 2
Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current 2 manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)
loop (optocoupler driver input) 3...7 no function (default = OFF)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) 8 manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)
TP42 Function J7 Function

Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
loop (optocoupler driver input) 2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) 3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
DS1...6 Function 5/6 5 connected to 6
DS1 green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used 7/8 7 connected to 8
DS2 green : UART2 working, red: UART2 error, off: interface not used
DS6 red flashing at:
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 4-23 COM Expander pcb
74 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11.1 Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs
The interfaces TB1...TB5 can be converted in the same way as the interfaces of the RDC. The plug-in
adapter pcbs must be inserted and fixed by means of a nut on the COM Expander pcb. The interfaces
cannot be used without an plug-in adapter pcb.
Plug- RS422 TTL TTY (20 mA RS232 RS485

in pcb current loop)
No. TB GE3044G218 GE3044G211 GE3044G212 GE3044G214 GE3044G218
1 RxD1 + RxD1 RxD1 + RxD1 RS485+ 1
2 RxD1 - GND RxD1 - GND RS485- 1
5 GND1 GND GND GND GND1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 75
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11.2 Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion
4.5.11.2.1 TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211
TTL TTL TTL

TP1
1
Output Input
5.0 V 5.0V
Logic "1"
2.4 V 2.0 V
1
0.4 V 0.8 V
ztr1_614.jpg
Logic "0"
0 V 0 V
ztr1_615.eps
TP2
Mark
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Fig. 4-24 TTL plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
76 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11.2.2 20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212
+
TP1
1
20 mA
1 20 mA Logic "1"
ztr1_616.jpg
0 mA Logic "0"
ztr1_617.eps
TP2 Mark
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Fig. 4-25 20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
4.5.11.2.3 RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214
TTL RS - 232 TTL

TP1
1 Output Input
+ 15 V + 15 V
Logic "0"
Space
+5V
+3V
1 -3V
-5V
ztr1_618.jpg
1 Logic "1"
Mark
- 15 V - 15 V
ztr1_619.eps
TP2 TP3
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop
Mark
Fig. 4-26 RS232 plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input Jumper on 1/2 = RxD inverted
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = default (RxD not inverted)
TP2, Output Jumper on 1/2 = TxD inverted
inversion Jumper on 2/3 = default (TxD not inverted)
TP3 Manufacturer‘s use
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 77
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.11.2.4 RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218
The conversion of RS485 is available at the COM Expander only.
TP2 TP1 TP4
1 1
ztr1_620.jpg
TP3 A
TTL TTL
RS - 422
A
TTL TTL B
RS - 485
B
Output Input
Output Input +5V +5V
+5V +5V
A A
A A

2 V min
2 V min
B B
B B
0 0
ztr1_621.eps
ztr1_622.eps
0 0
Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Par. Stop

Mark Mark
Fig. 4-27 RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input RS422:
inversion Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)
Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output RS422:
inversion Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)
Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
TP3, Jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = termination resistor, jumper 3, 4, 5,6 must be set as described below
Termination No jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = no termination resistor
Jumper on 3/4 = termination with 1 kΩ
Jumper on 5/6 = termination with 150 Ω
Jumper on 3/4 and on 5/6 = termination with 120 Ω
See page 44 for further information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
TP4 Jumper on 1/2 = set to 1/2 if the pcb is used for the COM Expander (default setting)
Jumper on 2/3 = set to 2/3 if the pcb is used for the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
78 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12 Operating Unit BD3027

zt1r_18.jpg
Fig. 4-28 Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing
The complete Operating Unit consists of four parts:

- Trackball BD 3028
- Radar Keyboard
- Trackpilot Keyboard
- Keyboard Controller
The three parts can be mounted separately. All Operating Units are equipped with the Trackball as
standard. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard can be mounted as add-ons or ordered ex
works.
The Operating Unit is mounted in the console housings or in the desktop housing, or it can be delivered
separately for shipyard installation purposes. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard have only
one common Keyboard Controller.
4.5.12.1 Remote Keyboard Electronics
It is possible to connect up to four slave Operating Units or to install the Operating Unit at a distance to
the Display Electronics Unit. For these purposes, the Remote Keyboard Electronics is needed. See the
technical manual of the Remote Keyboard Electronics for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 79
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.2 Trackball BD 3028
The Trackball consists of a ball and three function keys. The

function keys correspond in their purpose to the function keys
of a PC mouse.
The interface of the Trackball unit is a PS/2 interface, which
is common for PC’s.
The Trackball is connected to the Display Electronics Unit by
means of a cable of length 3 m with a standard PS/2
connector. The electronics unit of the Trackball cannot be
serviced. The setting of the jumpers must not be modified.
PS/2 connector pinning:
Pin Function
zt1r_19.jpg
1 Data
2 - Trackball
3 GND
4 +5V
5 Clock
6 -
4.5.12.3 Radar Keyboard
The Radar Keyboard is connected to the Keyboard

Controller in the Operating Unit’s housing.
The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to the same
Keyboard Controller. The Keyboard Controller offers a
PS/2 interface for the connection to the Display Elec-
tronics Unit. This interface combines the Radar
Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard.
The keyboards require a separate DC supply for the
backlighting. The back lighting is adjusted together with
the back lighting of the Trackpilot Keyboard.
zt1r_20.jpg
Radar Keyboard
80 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.12.4 Trackpilot Keyboard
The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to a Keyboard

zt1r_021.jpg
Controller in the Operating Unit’s housing. The Radar

Keyboard is connected to the same Keyboard
Controller. The Keyboard Controller offers a PS/2 inter-
face for the connection to the Display Electronics Unit.
This interface combines the Trackpilot Keyboard and
the Radar Keyboard.
The keyboard requires a separate DC supply for the
back lighting. The back lighting is adjusted together
with the back lighting of the Radar Keyboard.
Trackpilot Keyboard
4.5.12.5 Keyboard Electronics
Connection cable
Trackpilot Keyboard pcb Socket for Keyboard Controller Radar Keyboard pcb
zt1r_086.jpg
Controller GE3048G200
Trackball
Fig. 4-29 Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller
Figure 4-29 shows the back of an opened Operating Unit. It is equipped with the Trackball and both
keyboards. The Keyboard Controller can be connected to both keyboard pcbs. The connection cable
transfers the signals from one board to the other.
The keyboards are connected to the Display Electronics Unit by means of a cable of length 3 m with a
standard PS/2 connector. The keyboards’ illumination is supplied with power via a separate cable.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 81
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
The controller must be connected to the Radar Keyboard pcb. Only if no Radar Keyboard is installed, it
must be connected to the Trackpilot Keyboard.
The controller GE3048G200 is equipped with a PS/2 connector for the connection of an ASCII keyboard.
The shield cover has a hole for the connector.
PS/2 connector pinning:
Pin Function
1 Data
2 -
3 GND
4 +5 V
5 Clock
6 -
82 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
4.5.13 RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)
For the installation of a ON

retrofit kit, see Section 5.15. 1
J1
The RGB Buffer supplies up 4 Supply
to three monitors with the DS2 DS1
incoming signal of the
Graphics And Video Proc-
essor (GVP).
S1
The RGB Buffer receives the TP3 TP2 TP1
video signals (RGB) and the
synchronization signals
(HSYNC, VSYNC) via the
interface J2. The monitors
must be connected to the S3 S2 S1
15-pin HD-Sub connectors
J3, J4 and J5. Unused
outputs must be terminated
by means of the DIP-
ztr1_010.jpg
switches (output RGB1

cannot be terminated). The
decoupling and amplification J2 J3 J4 J5
of the signals are performed RGB input RGB1 output RGB2 output RGB3 output
by two circuits per video
channel with five outputs Fig. 4-30 RGB Buffer
each. The RGB Buffer circuits work with a constant amplification of 2 (+6 dB) and are optimized for moni-
tors with internal termination.
The maximum cable length between the RGB Buffer and the monitor inputs is 50 m if an RGB coaxial
cable is used via an additional adapter. The length of the VGA cable must not exceed 3 m. The cable
must be terminated. Usually, the monitors have an input impedance of 75 Ω, which is suitable for the
RGB Buffer.
The RGB Buffer must be supplied with +/-12 V via the connector J1. The two voltage regulators generate
an internal supply voltage of +/-5 V.
75 Ohm Output of 75 Ohm

75 Ohm cable Input of buffer, 75 Ohm buffer, cable
J2_1 AV=2 J3_1
Red, 75 Ohm
output of termination-
GVP resistor of
monitor1
75 Ohm
Output of 75 Ohm
75 Ohm buffer, cable
AV=2 J4_1
75 Ohm
75 Ohm termination-
resistor of
monitor2
S3_1
ztr1_012.eps
Output of 75 Ohm
75 Ohm buffer, cable
AV=2 J5_1
75 Ohm
termination-
ztr1_012.eps
75 Ohm
resistor of
monitor3
S1_4
Fig. 4-31 Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 83
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Switches
S1, S2, S3 Termination
On 1) Off 2)
S1_1 Inactive
S1_2 Output 3, J5, blue terminated Output 3, J5, blue not terminated
S1_3 Output 3, J5, green terminated Output 3, J5, green not terminated
S1_4 Output 3, J5, red terminated Output 3, J5, red not terminated
S2_1 Output 2, J4, red terminated Output 2, J4, red not terminated
S2_2 Output 2, J4, green terminated Output 2, J4, green not terminated
S2_3 Output 2, J4, blue terminated Output 2, J4, blue not terminated
S2_4 Inactive
S3_1 Output 2, J4, H-sync terminated Output 2, J4, H-sync not terminated
S3_2 Output 2, J4, V-sync terminated Output 2, J4, V-sync not terminated
S3_3 Output 3, J5, V-sync terminated Output 3, J5, V-sync not terminated
S3_4 Output 3, J5, H-sync terminated Output 3, J5, H-sync not terminated
1)
Termination = 75 Ω to AGND; select if no monitor is connected
2)
No termination; select, if monitor is connected
Connectors
J1, Power Supply J2, Video Input; J3, Output Monitor 1;
J4, Output Monitor 2, J5 Output Monitor 3
Pin Function
Pin Function Pin Function
1 -12 V
1 RED 9 n.c.
2 -12 V
2 GREEN 10 AGND
3 GND
3 BLUE 11 AGND
4 GND
4 AGND 12 n.c.
5 +12 V
5 AGND 13 Horizontal sync.
6 +12 V
6 AGND 14 Vertical sync.
7 GND
7 AGND 15 n.c.
8 GND
8 AGND
9 n.c.
10 n.c.
Test Pins LEDs

Pin Function Signal On Off
TP1 VCC (Out) +5 V DS1 -5V VBB on -5V VBB off
TP2 AGND (Out) 0V DS2 +5V VCC on +5V VCC off
TP3 VBB (Out) -5 V
84 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration
Technical Manual
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration
The BIOS of the system is configured ex works. A description of the settings is shown in Section 5.14.
The system configuration and most of the adjustments and settings can be performed by means of the
System Maintenance Manager. All adjustments which have to be performed by means of hardware
elements are described in Section 4, F u n c t i o n a l D e s c r i p t i o n . For a guide through the setting-to-work
process, see Section 6.
WARNING
For the use of the different software versions, some prereq-
uisites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w
for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 85
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position Technical Manual
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
5.1.1 Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100)
The drive module consists of the diskette drive and two brackets. Depending on the fitting position of the
Display Electronics Unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing or at the bottom
of the housing. The Display Electronics Unit is delivered with the drive module mounted at one side of
the housing. This version is needed in the case of console mounting. The diskette drive can be operated
through an opening in the cover of the housing.
Suitable openings and threaded bolts for the module exist in the side and in the cover of the housing.
The opening which is not used must be closed by means of a dummy plate. Follow these steps to modify
the fitting position of the drive module:
1. Disconnect the electronics unit from the mains supply. Open the housing and disconnect the
grounding cable.
2. Carefully disconnect the data cable and the power supply cable from the diskette drive.
3. Remove the four screws of the drive unit.
4. Dismount the brackets and mount them as shown in Figure 5-1.
For mounting at the side of the For mounting at the bottom of

housing (the diskette drive is the housing (the diskette drive
operated through an opening in is operated through an opening
the cover) in the side of the housing)
ztr1_602.gif
Fig. 5-1 Diskette drive brackets
5. Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must be
used to close the first opening which has been used so far.
6. A plate with adhesive tape is fixed inside the cover. This plate has to be stuck on behind the
opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.
86 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
Dummy plate
Inside of the cover
ztr1_605.gif
Diskette drive in the cover Diskette drive in the side

ztr1_606.gif
ztr1_607.gif
Fig. 5-2 Mounting of the diskette drive
7. Fix the drive module by means of the four screws.

8. Connect the data cable and the power supply cable to the diskette drive.
9. Connect the grounding cable and close the housing.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 87
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.1.2 Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100)
The drive module consist of the hard disk drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the diskette drive. Depending
on the fitting position of the electronics unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing
or at the cover of the housing. The electronics unit is delivered as a desktop version with the drive module
mounted at one side of the housing. This version is needed for the SCC console, the standard console
and for desktop mounting. For the compact console and for bulkhead mounting, the fitting position of the
electronics unit is different and the position of the drive module must be changed.
Follow the steps to modify the fitting position of the drive module:
1. Disconnect the electronics unit from mains supply.
2. Open the housing and disconnect the grounding cable.
3. Carefully disconnect the data cables and the three supply cables from the drives. Depending on the
drives version, the cables of the hard disk drive and/or the DVD-ROM drive are connected by means
of an adapter. The adapter(s) may be fixed with hot melt adhesive and cannot be removed. Two
different types of supply connector are available in the electronics unit. The type which has to be
used depends on the drive and the adapter. See Figure 5-3.
Data cable for hard disk and

DVD-ROM drive. The cable is
always connected to the IDE1
connector.
NOTE:
The DVD-ROM drive is
connected as a slave drive on
the same data cable as the
hard disk. It has no separate
data cable.
ztr1_628_mp.jpg
Data cable of
diskette drive
Power supply
connectors for
5.25" drives The power connector at
the adapter must not be
Power supply disconnected.
connector for 1
3.5" drives
1 Adapter
ztr1_636_mp.jpg
1
ztr1_632_mp.jpg
Fig. 5-3 Disconnection of the drive cables
88 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
4. Unscrew the 4 nuts (1) at the brackets. Pull the module out of the opening and then lift it carefully
at the front to get the shield out of the opening. Then lift the complete module out of the housing. If
necessary, the shield can be turned by removing the nut on top of the shield. When fastening the
nut again, ensure that the shield is adjusted in a way that the DVD-ROM drive can be opened
without rubbing against the shield.
2
1 2
1
Brackets
ztr1_630_mp.jpg
ztr1_629_mp.jpg
Fig. 5-4 Dismounting of the drive module
5. Unscrew the nuts (2) (see Figure 5-4) and disassemble the brackets. Change the brackets from the
left to the right and vice versa (1)! The brackets are different from each other. The brackets must be
mounted with turning through 180° (2.). Do not fasten the nuts.
Shield 2. 180°
1. Change brackets
ztr1_633_mp.jpg
ztr1_634_mp.jpg
For the electronis unit in SCC console, For the electronics unit in compact console
standard console, desktop version
Fig. 5-5 Turning the brackets
6. Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must be
used to close the first opening, which has been used so far.
A plate with adhesive tape is fixed on the power supply unit. This plate has to be stuck on behind
the opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 89
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
7. Connect the cables to the drives (the hard disk drive is the
master if only one data cable must be used for DVD-ROM
drive and hard disk) and mount the drive module at its
new position. Be careful with the cables. They must not
be squeezed under the brackets and must not be led over
ztr1_635_mp.jpg
sharp edges. Do not fasten the nuts (3).

Adjust roughly the position of the drives before fastening
one of the nuts (2) on each side. Check the position by
closing the cover. The drives must fit into the opening.
Then adjust the position of the drive module and fasten the nuts (3). Check the position of the
module by closing the cover. The surface of the diskette drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the cover
must be on the same level.
Then loosen the nuts (2) and adjust the drives so that they are at right angles to the opening (and
therefore at right angles to the brackets). Fasten the nuts (2).
WARNING:
It is important that the drives are mounted without any
tension. The drives must be mounted exactly in parallel and
at right angles to the brackets. Avoid any torsion of the
drive module while mounting and adjusting it in the elec-
tronics unit housing.
8. The data cable must not cover the memory modules or the processor fan!
9. Connect the grounding cable to the cover and close the housing.
90 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing
5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing
The RADARPILOT 1100 can be upgraded to be a CHARTRADAR 1100 or it is delivered as a CHAR-

TRADAR 1100 ex works. If the radar is delivered as a CHARTRADAR ex works, the CHART Function
Licence Key is still stored in the radar and a sticker with the CHART Function Licence Key is fixed on the
radar housing (fan outlet)
To enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities of a standard radar, the licence must be ordered. The
licensing procedure must be performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key must
be ordered when hardware components of the CHARTRADAR have been exchanged.
1. The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 on
page 120).
2. The Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by
- e-mail (shipservice@sam-electronics.de, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),
- fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or
- phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).
The following information must be added:
- Date of Commissioning
- Name of the Service Engineer
- Vessel / Yard / Build No.
- Shipping Company
- Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit
3. The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must be
entered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
User Chart Objects

Even if the licensing is not performed, it is possible to display the User Chart Objects, which have been
defined on the connected CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT
must be configured as chartserver (see the technical manuals of the CHARTPILOT for further informa-
tion).
5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing
The charts are licensed, installed and maintained at a CHARTPILOT which must be connected. See the
technical manual of the CHARTPILOT for further information.
The CHART Function Licence Key is still stored in the MULTIPILOT ex works and a sticker with the
Licence Key is fixed on the radar housing (fan outlet).
If the licence key has not been generated so far, it must be ordered. The licensing procedure must be
performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key must be ordered when hardware
components of the MULTIPILOT have been exchanged.
1. The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 on
page 120).
2. The Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by
- e-mail (shipservice@sam-electronics.de, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),
- fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or
- phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 91
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing Technical Manual
The following information must be added:

- Date of Commissioning
- Name of the Service Engineer
- Vessel / Yard / Build No.
- Shipping Company
- Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit
3. The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must be
entered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the MULTIPILOT functionalities.
92 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
NOTE:
The radar and the AIS itself must be restarted after any change in the configuration for the AIS. Otherwise
these modifications may have no effect.
NACOS xx-5 and RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 Systems

In Radar 1100 series systems or if the radar is part of a NACOS xx-5 system, the radar must be param-
eterized for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400, because the interfaces of the radar are used for the
ship’s sensor data output. Follow the instructions in Section 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3.
5.4.1 Requirements
The following hard/software must exist for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400:
- Analog Interface GE3044G207 for the connection of the AIS Primary Display Port with SH3014G203,
RS422 interface adapter (plug-in pcb for the Analog Interface) or
- Ethernet network adapter
5.4.2 Installation and Cable Connections
1. Installation:
See the technical manual of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 for information regarding the installation of the
antennas and the electronics unit.
2. Power supply:
The power supply and the antennas must be connected as described in the technical manual of the
UAIS DEBEG 3400.
3. Sensor interfaces:
The sensor input channels of the AIS electronics unit (connector 3) must be connected to one of the
serial I/Os of the Indicator (Interconnection Board GE3044G216, TB1). The baud rate of the output
of the serial interface of the radar is always the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unit
which is connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.
Interconnection Board
(Each of the 4 serial interfaces of the (Each of the 3 serial interfaces S1,
Display Electronics Unit can be used. Ship's Sensor Data S2, S3 of the UAIS can be used.
This is only an example.) This is only an example.)
TB Connector 3
ztr1_609.eps
5 GND 7 GND
4 TxD 1 - 6 Channel 1 -
3 TxD 1 + 5 Channel 1 +
Fig. 5-6 Interfaces for ship’s sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400
4. Data link for display and operating data via Ethernet LAN:
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit must be connected to the Ethernet LAN of the radar/MULTI-
PILOT system. An Analog Interface is not necessary for the connection of the AIS in this case.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 93
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration Technical Manual
5. Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (COM Expander):
The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to a serial
interface of the COM Expander (TB1...5). The plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218 must be connected
to the corresponding socket of the COM Expander pcb.
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400
MULTIPILOT 1100
COM expander
TB1...5 Connector 2
ztr1_643.eps
1 AIS RxD, Input + 7 Output +

2 AIS RxD, Input - 8 Output -
3 AIS TxD, Output + 5 Input +
4 AIS TxD, Output - 6 Input -
5 GND 1 GND
Fig. 5-7 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander
6. Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (Analog Interface):
The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to the serial
interface of the Analog Interface (TB10,11,14...16).
Important! See Section 3.2.3 on page 37 for systems with more than one Analog Interface.
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/ Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400
MULTIPILOT 1100
Analog Interface
TB Connector 2
ztr1_642.eps
10 AIS RxD, Input - 8 Output -

11 AIS RxD, Input + 7 Output +
14 AIS TxD, Output - 6 Input -
15 AIS TxD, Output + 5 Input +
16 GND 1 GND
Fig. 5-8 Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface
7. The following interfaces of the UAIS are not connected to the radar:
- Pilot Port (must be accessible for the pilot)
- Long Range Port (must be connected to a long range communication system)
- UAIS DEBEG internal position system (can be used as position sensor)
- UAIS DEBEG internal alarm relay (can be connected to an alarm system)
5.4.3 Configuration
The following parameters must be set:

1. System Layout
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > AIS
The AIS and its connection to the system must be defined by means of the settings Not Connected
(default), Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to LAN.
94 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
2. Administration data:
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > Adminis-
tration
Parameters (these data are transmitted via VHF and must be filled in):
- Vessel
- Call Sign
- MMSI Number
- IMO Number
- Type of Ship or Type of Ship Coded as Number
The setting of the Type of Ship parameter influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu. The
list of the Cargo or Ship Type menu in the Voyage Data menu is adapted to the Type of Ship
setting. If the type of ship is not available in the list box Type of Ship, it is possible to select
the corresponding number in the Type of Ship coded as Number data field. This parameter
also influences the operator’s Voyage Data menu.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > System
Position and other Ship Dimensions
Parameters (see Figure 6-4 on page 163 for further information):
- Distance to Bow, Distance to Stern, Distance to SB, Distance to P
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Basic Radar
Parameter:
- AIS Lost Target without Alarm
Default setting is 16.0 NM. If an AIS target is lost outside this range, no alarm is generated.
3. Interface for the Ship’s Sensor Data:
The serial I/O to which the Sensor Input Channel of the AIS electronics unit is connected must be
parameterized as ship sensor data output.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Inter-
faces > Serial Interfaces 1...4 > Output
Parameter:
- Serial Output used as (select AIS Navigation Data)
Note: The baud rate of the output is the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unit which
is connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.
By means of this parameter, the repetition rate of 1 Hz is automatically set for the telegrams HDT,
ROT, VBW, GLL, VTG, DTM. It is not necessary to configure the Output > Transfer parameters.
4. Interface for the Primary Display Port (not necessary if the AIS is connected via LAN):
Connection via Analog Interface:
The serial interface of the Analog Interface must be configured as AIS interface.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >
Serial I/O 1
Parameters:
- Driver (set to AIS Automatic Ident System)
- Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 95
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration Technical Manual
Connection via COM Expander:

The serial interface to which the AIS is connected must be configured as AIS interface.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >
Serial I/O X
Parameters:
- Driver (set to AIS Automatic Identification System)
- Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)
5. AIS configuration
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > AIS
Parameters:
- AIS Channel (AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice)
- Distance of GPS Antenna Longitudinal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96)
- Distance of GPS Antenna Transversal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96))
- AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1...S3 (select IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud)
8m 8m
-4 m 4 m
LT = Log Transducer, defines the system position

10 m
10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m distance longitudinal to system position

LT
RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m distance longitudinal to system position
- Longitudinal +
-110 m
120 m
-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m distance transversal and -85 m distance

RS longitudinal to system position
RX P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m distance transversal and -85 m distance
P1
longitudinal to System Position
P2
PAIS PAIS = AIS GPS antenna, -2 m distance transversal and -110 m distance
longitudinal to system position
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 5-9 System position (example)
NOTE:
In addition, it is necessary to configure the AIS in the System Layout menu of a connected CHART-
PILOT 1100 to enable the AIS functions of the CHARTPILOT.
96 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300
5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300
1. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > VDR
Select Connected to VDR DEBEG 4300.
2. System Maintenance Manager > Configure > VDR
The following parameters define from which Indicator the VDR (Voyage Data Recorder) is supplied
with radar pictures.
Parameters:
Main Radar:
Select Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s. The radar picture is
stored on the final recording medium and on the hard disk of the VDR.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s additionally. The radar
picture is sent with an offset of 7.5 s to the picture of the main radar. If a further Indicator is
selected (see parameter below), the picture of that Indicator is transmitted alternating with the
picture of this Indicator, so that the additional pictures are sent by each Indicator every 30 s.
The radar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture additionally. The radar picture is
sent alternating with the first additional picture m.a., so that it is transmitted every 30 s. The
radar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.
3. Interfaces of the radar must not be configured. The VDR is supplied with data via the Ethernet LAN.
For further information, see the documentation of the VDR.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 97
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.6 System Maintenance Manager Technical Manual
5.6 System Maintenance Manager
ATTENTION
The window of the System Maintenance Manager partly covers the PPI.
Therefore, the System Maintenance Manager may be started only if the
system is not being used for navigation.
Some of the system maintenance functions must not be used by unauthorized persons. The registers
concerned are locked by means of a password.
Register
For the use of

an additional Restart the
ASCII keyboard radar
Exit the Mainte-
nance Manager
ztr1_104.gif
Fig. 5-10 System Maintenance Manager window
5.6.1 Trackball and Cursor
If you are already familiar with graphic man-machine interfaces, More keys for left-
you might be able to skip this section. Before doing so, you handed and right-
should have a look at the picture of the Trackball beside this text. handed people
Every operating step begins with the operator moving the cursor
by means of the Trackball to a particular place on the window (to
a text item, a numerical value, a symbol on the PPI or any Do key
desired place on the PPI). The next step is always the pressing
of one of the Trackball keys. In the following, this brief pressing
of the key is called clicking. What then happens depends on the
key used, the element on which clicking took place, and the oper-
ztr1_102.jpg
ating situation, and is the subject of these instructions.

The cursor has a resting position to which it goes 30 seconds
after the last operating process. This position is situated beside
the PPI, below the ACQ TGT area. This function is switched off in the service windows. If the cursor
98 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.6 System Maintenance Manager
is situated outside the PPI, it is shaped like a hand or an arrow. Inside the PPI, it is a cross. This
function is switched off if the System Maintenance Manager is opened, because its window can
partly cover the PPI.
Do Key
The most important key is the middle one. Almost all data areas react to this key, which performs
the functions that are needed the most frequently. In the following instructions, it is called the "Do
key". In the following, "clicking" always means clicking with the Do key unless stated otherwise.
MORE Keys
The two keys situated above the Do key are called "More keys". They have identical functions (for
ergonomical operation for left-handed people and right-handed people). Not all elements which can
be operated by means of the Do key react to the More key also, and if they do, then always with
functions other than those of the Do key. Furthermore, by pressing of the More key, open menus or
lists can generally be closed without any results, and inputs can be aborted.
- If an ASCII keyboard is connected, the check box ASCII Keyboard in the lower left-hand part of the
window "System Maintenance Manager" must be set (✓ appears).
- All windows and dialogue boxes can be left by clicking on the symbol in the top right-hand
corner of the window or dialogue box or by clicking on the Exit button.
- The windows and dialogue boxes can be moved. Place the cursor on the upper bar of the window
until the cursor changes from a single arrow to a quadruple arrow. Press the Do key and keep it
pressed while moving the window to the new position by means of the Trackball. Release Do to fix
the window or dialogue box at the new position.
- If figures or letters have to be entered, a small window with a
keyboard appears. If an ASCII keyboard is connected
(suggested for convenient parameterizing), it can be used to
make all the entries needed. All entries are shown in the styl-
ized display in the keyboard window. If no ASCII keyboard is
connected, the entries must be performed via the Trackball and the Do key. Place the cursor on a
button (figure or letter) of the keyboard window and click with Do on this button. The selected figure
or letter appears in the stylized display of the keyboard. To complete an entry, click on the Enter
button of the keyboard.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 99
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.6 System Maintenance Manager Technical Manual
5.6.2 Entering the System Maintenance Manager
To enter the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Menu button. The message "CAUTION - System
will leave normal operation mode" appears. Click on Yes to enter the Maintenance Manager. The window
"System Maintenance Manager" is opened, where six different registers can be selected with the Track-
ball.
If the one of the registers is selected, a dialogue box for the password is displayed
(not for Selfcheck, Telemonitoring Data and Tools).
ztr1_130.gif
To enter the password, click into the data field and type the password by means of an
additional ASCII keyboard or by means of the virtual keyboard by using the Trackball
and the Do key. Confirm with Enter. If the service switch on the RDC is activated, the
input can be passed by clicking on OK without entering the password.
Each time the registers Service or
Configure are selected, the technician is
asked to fill in a service report. It is highly
advisable to state all modifications, repairs
and maintenance work in this report. The
request can be suppressed by activating the
checkbox Do not show again. The
checkbox is deactivated automatically by
leaving the System Maintenance Manager.
ztr1_133.gif
Service Report
5.6.3 Service Log-in Levels
Two log-in levels are available for the service technicians. The standard log-in level (service) offers
access to all relevant parameters. For more complex installations, the advanced service levels must be
selected.
The service log-in level is determined by means of the password.
The currently selected service level is displayed in the title of the System Maintenance Manager window.
100 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager
5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager
Menu Tools Date & Time

See page 102 Diskette
Utilities... Map Transfer/Delete
Maintenance Track Transfer
/Delete 2)
System Maintenance Manager
These three menus are also available for Selfcheck Keyboard
See page 98 operators, see also the Operating Instructions. See page 105 Buzzer
Map Storage Test
Configure Config. File Info See page 114 RDC Test Pictures
See page 112 ARPA
System Layout See page 114
Telemonitoring Data Versions
System/Ship Parameters Ship Data
Basic Radar See page 109 Faults
See page 115
Startup Sensor Selec. Fault History
Radar Indicator Indicator 1...5 Administration

See page 120 Serial Interfaces
Transceiver Transceiver 1...5
Serial I/O 1...4
Sensor Interfaces Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 Gyro
See page 127 Pulse Log
AIS See page 93 Serial I/O 1...5
NACOS 1) TRACKPILOT
See page 134 ENGINE INTERFACE
Planning System 1) See page 134
Conning 3) See page 135
ECDIS 4) Chart Database

See page 138
VDR See page 97
Service Indicator Monitor Adjust

See page 139 See page 140 RDC Service + Adjust
Check Alarm I/O
Serial I/O Monitor
Software Update (+PCBs)
PCB Software Update
RKE Software Update 1)
RKE Settings 1)
Run from Diskette
Transceiver Setting to Work Headmarker

See page 145 Advanced Settings Magnetron Trigger Delay
Magnetron Hours Tuning Offset STC Delay
Antenna Information STC Compensation Video MBS
PMA Display
Interswitch Input Adjust
PM Adjust
See page 150
NACOS 1) TRACKPILOT
1) Appears depending on the system layout
See page 150 ENGINE INTERFACE
2)
Only if no CHARTPILOT is connected
3)
Commissioning Data Config Transfer For CHARTRADAR or MULTIPILOT
4)
See page 151 Service Report For MULTIPILOT
Fig. 5-11 Menu structure
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 101

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.8 Tools Menu Technical Manual
5.8 Tools Menu
5.8.1 Date & Time
By means of the menu Date &

Time the date and time of the
computer (motherboard) can be
set. The upper data field shows
the existing date and time. To Increase
modify the date and/or time, click Decrease
into one of the three data fields
of Set Time or Set Date and
enter a new value by means of
an optional ASCII keyboard or
with the aid of the up and down Data fields
buttons to the left of the data
fields. If the button Apply &
Save is clicked, the values are
saved, but the radar must be
ztr1_134.gif
restarted to activate the new

date and time. The date and time
of the computer are different
from the system date and time. Tools / Date & Time
The system date and time is
detemined by the GPS data. The date and time of the computer are used for file operations (e.g. date
and time of the R10K.sam file) and in can be used if the system time from the GPS data is not available.
It is possible to set the system date and time with the computer date and time by means of the Set to
Computer Time button.
5.8.2 Map Transfer
By means of the function Map Transfer, the

maps which have been edited on the Indi-
cator can be saved to a diskette or to another
Indicator connected to the system. The maps
can also be read from a diskette or from
another Indicator and saved onto the local
Indicator.
To transmit maps to another Indicator or
diskette, the Transmit button must activated.
The destination for the transfer must be
selected from the Destination listbox. The
files to be transferred must be selected in the
Files in Source window. By clicking on
Add>> the files are copied with their directory
ztr1_156.gif
structure to the Files to Transfer window.

The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
Tools / Map Transfer, Transmit
102 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.8 Tools Menu
To receive maps from another Indicator or to

restore them from a diskette, the Receive
button must be activated.
The source of the maps must be selected
from the Source listbox. The files to be trans-
ferred have to be selected in the Files in
Source window on the left. By clicking on
Add>>, the files are copied with their direc-
tory structure to the Files to Transfer
window. The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
By means of the Clear button, the selected
files can be deleted from the Files for
Transfer window on the right. As long as files
ztr1_131.gif
are shown in this window, it is not possible to

change from Transmit to Receive or vice
versa.
Tools / Map Transfer, Receive
Existing files are overwritten with both func-
tions. A warning message appears in this case and the transfer must be confirmed.
It is not possible to transfer maps from or to RADAR 9xxx Indicators.
5.8.3 Map Delete
If the memory of the RDC is not sufficient for

the map files or if maps are not needed any
longer, they can be deleted.
First of all, the source must be selected from
the Delete in listbox. The files to be deleted
have to be selected in the Files in ... window
on the left. By clicking on Add>>, the files are
copied with their directory structure to the
Files to Delete window on the right. To start
the deletion, the button Delete... must be
clicked. The warning message that appears
must be confirmed.
By means of the Clear button, the selected
files can be deleted from the Files to Delete
ztr1_008.gif
window.
NOTE:
The diskette can contain maps, tracks and Tools / Map Delete
the configuration files. The free space on the
diskette can be checked by means of the Diskette function.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 103

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.8 Tools Menu Technical Manual
5.8.4 Track Transfer
If a planning system like the CHARTPILOT is

connected, the button Track Transfer is not
visible. The tracks must be handled by
means of the planning system in this case.
With Track Transfer, the tracks which have
been edited on the Indicator can be saved to
a diskette or to another Indicator connected
to the system.
Tracks can also be read from a diskette or
from another Indicator and stored in the local
Indicator.
The operation of the Track Transfer function
is the same as for the Map Transfer function.
ztr1_195.gif
Tools / Track Transfer
5.8.5 Diskette
The Floppy tools provide the following func-

tions:
Info...: Shows the capacity, the used space
and the free space of the diskette in the
diskette drive.
Erase...: Deletes all files on the diskette in
the diskette drive. Caution: All files on the
diskette will be lost.
Format...: Formats the diskette in the diskette
drive. Caution: All files on the diskette will be
lost.
ztr1_157.gif
Tools / Floppy
104 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.9 Selfcheck Menu
5.9 Selfcheck Menu
Click on the register Selfcheck in the

System Maintenance Manager. Select
the unit that has to be tested from the
list and start the test with the Start Test
button. An additional window especially
for the selected selfcheck appears. To
close the window and stop the test, click
on the symbol in the top right
corner of the additional window. The
test pictures can be stopped by clicking
on the Stop button in the additional
window.
If errors occur during a test, a corre-
sponding message is shown in the field
Selfcheck Messages.
ztr1_140.gif
Selfcheck menu
5.9.1 Keyboard
The Keyboard Selfcheck tests the Trackball unit and the (optional) keyboard(s). After the start, a sche-
matic picture of the operating elements appears.
When the keys are operated, the corresponding key of the schematic picture is pressed down virtually,
which means that this key is functioning properly.
If the boxes situated at the rotary knob symbols fill up in red in accordance with the operation of the rotary
knobs, this means that the rotary knobs are functioning properly.
5.9.2 Buzzer
After the start, a list of various acoustic alarm signals appears. If, when one of the buttons in the list has
been clicked, the relevant acoustic signal is sounded, this means that the acoustic alarm is OK.
5.9.3 Map Storage Test
The Map Storage Test generates test maps, stores them to the IDE memory module and deletes them
afterwards. Click on Start Test to begin the test. If the test has been passed successfully the message
"Map Storage Test : passed" appears in the display field. If the memory failed the test, error messages
appear and the IDE memory module must be exchanged.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 105

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.9 Selfcheck Menu Technical Manual
5.9.4 RDC Test Pictures
After the start, a list of the various test pictures that can be displayed appears. By means of these test
pictures, you can determine whether the video processing of the radar data converter (RDC) is working
properly.
In the case of pictures 1 to 3, only the brilliance adjustment function is active; in the case of picture 4,
the adjustment functions for gain and range are also active.
Picture 1
In each row of blue to yellow squares, the
yellow intensity must increase from left to
right.
The squares move slowly downwards.
Each square must be uniformly coloured.
ztr1_105.gif
Picture 2
In the middle square, 16 colours are displayed
cyclically one after another.
ztr1_106.gif
106 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.9 Selfcheck Menu
Picture 3
Each of the four sectors has eight intensities.
They are moved round in the clockwise direc-
tion.
ztr1_107.gif
Picture 4
The illustration shows the test picture in the
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: Normal setting
ztr1_108.gif
Picture 5
The illustration shows the test picture in the
following case:
- Range: 6 NM
- Gain: Maximum
If the gain is reduced, the intensity of the rings
decreases, beginning with the inner rings of
the sets of six.
The signal for this picture is fed into the RDC
behind the input potentiometer. If the test
picture is displayed as described, the analog
and the digital part of the RDC are working
ztr1_109.gif
properly.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 107

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.9 Selfcheck Menu Technical Manual
5.9.5 ARPA
By means of the ARPA function test, the

overall performance of the ARPA function
(generated by the RDC pcb) can be assessed.
This should be done periodically.
Select the 6 NM range and select ARPA from
the list. The individual echoes displayed are
synthetic targets:
- It must be possible to acquire them
manually.
- When the acquisition / guard zone is
placed over one or more targets, auto-
matic acquisition must take place,
together with the associated symbols and
ztr1_127.gif
alarms. The targets must be tracked

automatically.
- All targets travel along with the own ship.
Therefore, their true courses and true speeds must be the same as the own ship's course and
speed.
The ARPA test picture is not available if the system is not an ARPA radar.
108 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu
5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu
All information which has been listed stays in the list. It is possible to scroll through this list by means of
a scrollbar. The list must be deleted manually by means of the Clear button.
5.10.1 Listing the System Faults
Existing system faults (which generate the alarm indication SYSTEM FAULT xxxxx) can be listed. This
function is also accessible to the operator because, in the event of a fault, a service visit can be better
prepared or omitted altogether if the service station can be informed of the fault code list beforehand.
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list. New informa-
tion is added to the list, so that it is possible to scroll through this list. The list can be deleted by clicking
on the Clear button.
Present Faults
List of present
system faults
Generates a list of the

system faults that exist
Deletes the
display of data
Refresh switched on: The fault
list is continually updated
Generates an indication of the soft-

ware version, see Section 5.10.2.
ztr1_111.gif
Fig. 5-12 System fault list (present faults)
To list the present system faults, click on Faults. All system faults that exist at the time are listed. New
faults are not added to the list.
If the Refresh function is switched on, new faults are added to the list and the error detection of the radar
is more sensitive. A small square lights up in the Faults button if this function is activated. To disable the
function, click on the Faults button again.
For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 and
Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 109

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu Technical Manual
Fault History, System Integrity Faults
History of the
system faults
Generates a history of the

system faults and deletes
the fault history (More key) Deletes the
display of data
Saves the errors

Generates an indication of the soft- and the version
ware version, see Section 5.10.2. data on a diskette
ztr1_600.gif
Fig. 5-13 System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults)
To show the history of system faults, click on Fault History. All system faults that appeared so far are
listed. The column Count shows how often the error appeared in the past. The date and the time corre-
sponds to the date and time when the error appeared for the first time.
For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 and
Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.
Below the Fault History, the System Integrity Faults list shows the processes which have caused a
system crash.
Deletion of the Fault History

With the Clear button, the display is cleared, but not the history. To delete the error history, click on Fault
History by means of the More key.
Saving the Versions and Faults on a Diskette

By means of the Save to Disk button, the ship data, the software version list, the Fault History and the
System Integrity Fault list are saved as an ASCII file on a diskette. This ASCII file is also shown in the
Telemonitoring Data window (except of the ship data). The Fault History is deleted automatically.
Existing files on the diskette are overwritten.
110 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu
5.10.2 Determining the Software Versions
To display the software versions, click on Versions. The software version of the radar version and some
of its main components are indicated on the display.
List of software versions Software Version

of the radar
Software version of the
software in the IDE memory
module
Scrollbar
This deletes the

display of data
ztr1_142.gif
Fig. 5-14 List of software versions
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list so that new
information is added to the list when the Version button is clicked. It might be necessary to scroll through
this list. The list can be deleted by clicking on the Clear button.
Remote Keyboard Electronics

For master/slave or remote installations, at least two Remote Keyboard Electronics units are needed.
These components are listed as follows (example for one master with three slaves):
RKE*/aMST 1 GE3048G200 = Master with address 1, "*" = connected to this electronics unit
RKE /aSLV 5 GE3048G200 = Slave with address 5
The software version of the pcbs is shown as well.
The mode (master/slave) and the numbers of the Remote Keyboard Electronics are set by means of DIP
switches on the Remote Keyboard Electronics pcb. For further information, see the corresponding tech-
nical manual.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 111

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11 Configure Menu Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
By means of the Configure menu, the system parameters can be entered. It is organized into several
submenus as System Layout, Radar, AIS, Sensor Interfaces or NACOS.
The size of the tree in the left-hand window depends on the settings which have been made in the
System Layout menu. Only components which have been defined in the system layout appear in the
tree.
5.11.1 Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons
Defaults Button
The button Defaults sets all parameters of the opened window/menu and of the submenus to the default
values. Menus in parallel or menus of higher levels are not set to the default values.
Save Button
To save modified parameters in the IDE memory module and in the component which has been selected
for configuration, click on Save.
Leaving without Modifications

If parameter settings have been changed, the operator is asked about saving the modifications when he
is leaving the menu. To save the settings, click on Save & Exit. To drop the modifications and keep the
old settings, click on Cancel.
Saving Parameters in the Analog Interface/COM Expander

The parameters are saved online in the IDE memory module and in the component. The parameters are
transmitted to the Analog Interface automatically each time while booting the system.
Saving Parameters in the TRACKPILOT

The parameters are saved by means of the Save button in the IDE memory module and in the TRACK-
PILOT. When the TRACKPILOT is selected, the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT are compared
with the ones in the IDE memory module‘s ones.
5.11.2 Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters
By clicking Save, the parameters of the selected Transceiver are stored in the IDE memory
module and in the TCU. Some of the parameters work immediately after clicking Save (for
example, the parameter Azimuth Pulses per Revolution).
Some of the parameters only take effect after a restart (for example, the parameter Speed
Capability). When such a parameter has been modified and saved, a warning wich requests the
restarting of the system appears when the System Maintenance Manager is going to be exited. If the
restart is not performed, the parameter has no effect.
112 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.3 Navigation in the Menu Structure
On the left-hand side of the configure screen, the menu tree is displayed. This tree can be expanded by
clicking on the + symbols. Then the next level of the branch behind the symbol + is shown and the +
becomes a -. To hide the twig structure, click on the - symbol. Use the button Expand below the tree to
show the complete tree structure. Return to the simplified display with Collapse.
View with compressed tree and reduced list.
Shows the Shows all items (all

complete tree Browse buttons
structure disappear)
Shows all items of
this menu item (this
Browse button
disappears)
Shows the following

branch
ztr1_143.gif
View with expanded tree and expanded list.
Hides the complete Reduces the list (all

tree structure Browse buttons
appear)
Click to open the
drop-down list box
with all available
settings
Hides the Scrollbars
following branch
Click Exit to
leave the config-
ztr1_144.gif
urator.
Fig. 5-15 Configure menus
Select an item of the tree to display the appropriate list boxes on the right-hand side of the configure
window. The selected item is marked in the tree. The items can be selected directly by means of the
Trackball and its DO key.
Drop-down list boxes can be opened by clicking on ▼. The arrow changes into ▲ if the list box is opened.
Click on ▲ to close the list box.
With the buttons Compress and Expand, the list of visible data fields or list boxes can be reduced or
extended. For example if one parameter has to be set for all Transceivers, the data fields of all Trans-
ceivers can be collected in a group by means of the button Compress and can be made visible in a
submenu of their own by clicking on the button Browse. If the buttons Expand and Compress have no
function, they are coloured.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 113

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.4 Configuration File Info
The data fields of the Configuration File Info show the date and the time of the last modification in the
configuration file and the number of the Indicator where the modification has been performed.
5.11.5 System Layout
This menu defines which components exist in the system.
System Layout
Configure > System Layout
Local Indicator Number (this one) Shows the Indicator (number) of the operated Indicator. The Indi-
cator number must be set by means of S1 on the RDC (see Section
4.5.4 from page 53 onwards).
Indicator
> Indicator 1... 5 Select Not Connected (default) / RADARPILOT 1100 or MULTIP-
ILOT 1100
Defines the type of Indicator. If MULTIPILOT 1100 is selected, the
ECDIS menu is available for this Indicator.
Transceiver
> Transceiver 1 ... 5 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Interswitch (PCI) Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
If more than two Indicators or Transceivers are connected in a
system, the Interswitch is needed to switch the TVA signals.
Sensor Interface
> Sensor Interface 1 ... 2 Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Sensor interfaces are the
- Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface) for the connection of an
analog gyro, an analog log and an AIS, the
- COM Expander with 5 serial interfaces.
NOTE:
If "Not Connected" has been selected, it is not permissible to
connect an Analog Interface. This can cause problems on the
CAN bus.
NACOS Configuration (not for standard radar systems)
> TRACKPILOT Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a TRACKPILOT is connected to the system.
> ENGINE INTERFACE Select Connected, Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether an ENGINE INTERFACE is connected to the
system.
This is the NACOS Backup System 2 Select No (default) or Yes
In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems. This parameter should be set
to Yes only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Ethernet LAN Select One Net (default) or Two Sub-nets
In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems, or alternatively, the Ethernet
LAN can be divided in two sub-nets. This parameter should be set
to Two Sub-nets only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Planning System
114 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System Layout ( cont. )

Configure > System Layout
> Connected Planning System Select No/1/2/3 or more than 3
Select No for standard radar systems.
RADARPILOT:
Defines whether one or more CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT
1100 are connected as a planning system. User Chart Objects
which have been defined at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can
be displayed in the radar PPI or the radar can be licensed as a
CHARTRADAR.
MULTIPILOT:
If no CHARTPILOT is connected, it is not possible to perform the
installation, update and licensing of charts.
AIS Select Not Connected (default)/Connected to Sensor Interface or
Connected to LAN
Defines whether an AIS is connected to the system and if it is
connected via LAN or to a sensor interface.
VDR Select Not connected (default) or connected to DEBEG 4300.
Defines whether the radar supplies a VDR DEBEG 4300 with data
via Ethernet LAN.
5.11.6 System / Ship Parameters
By means of this menu, the basic data of the ship and of the system can be entered.
System / Ship Parameters
Configure > System / Ship Parameters
Ship Data
> Administration Common ship data. Enter comments and names for:
- Vessel (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Shipping Company
- Flag
- Call Sign (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Phone
- Fax
Ship Data for AIS: (values must be set!)
- MMSI Number
Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number for the Automatic
Identification System (AIS) (default = 0)
- IMO Number
IMO Number used for the Automatic Identification System (AIS)
(default = 0)
- Type of Ship
Select Not defined/Passenger Ship/Cargo Ship/Tanker/
High Speed Craft/Pilot Vessel/SAR Vessel/Tug/Port Tender/
Anti-Pollution Vessel/Law Enforcement Vessel/
Medical Transports/Fishing Vessel/Towing Vessel/
Sailing Vessel/Pleasure Craft/WIG or Only Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship which is transmitted by the AIS.
- Type of Ship Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship coded as a number for the AIS
The parameters Type of Ship and Type of Ship Coded as
Number are coupled with each other. If a type of ship has been
selected, the corresponding number is set automatically.
> System Position and other Ship The system position defines a coordinate origin for the position
Dimensions calculation (normally the location of the DOLOG transducer). These
values are also very important if an AIS is connected.
> Distance to Bow Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to Stern Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to SB Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 115

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont. )

> Distance to P Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Length at Waterline Set a value in 0.1 m steps
The parameter specifies the ship’s length between the perpendicu-
lars for squat calculation.
> Nominal Speed Set a value in 0.1 kt steps (default = 20.0 kt).
Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Acceleration Set a value in 0.005 m/s² steps (default is 0.020 m/s²).
Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Maximum ROT Alarm Limit Set a value in 1 °/min steps (default is 0 °/min = no check).
The ROT sensor (gyro) is checked against this limit.
> Position Quality Check Select Off (default) / Standard Quality / Medium Quality or Low
Quality.
The position sensor is checked against unexpected differences
between the position values.
> Minimum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 0.03 NM...1.00 NM
(default is 0.25 NM).
Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Maximum Radius Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 1.00 NM...3.00 NM
(default is 2.00 NM).
Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Gyro Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Gyro Monitoring functions
which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).
> On/Off The following menu items appear only if On is selected.
> Gyro against Magnetic Compass Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Gyro monitoring against the magnetic compass (HDG/MAG).
> Gyro against COG of Main Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Position Sensor Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the main posi-
tion sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course
over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/
COG).
> Gyro against COG of Redundant Set a value in 1° steps (default = 0° = Off).
Position Sensor Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the redundant
position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the
course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a
drift (HDG/COG).
116 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

> Ignore Gyro against COG above Set a value in 1°/min steps (default = 0°/min = Off).
ROT of: Ignore the difference between gyro and COG above a rate of turn
of this value. If the ROT value is large, the COG of the position
sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro which causes
an increase in the difference. This parameter has an effect on the
parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor.
Factor 1 = actual ROT for the example
Heading/
COG 2 = value of parameter Ignore
1.0 Gyro against COG above ROT of
1 2 ROT
Example: ROT 1 = 30°/min, ROT 2 = 120°/min,
Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°
- ROT 30°/min: Factor = 0.75 -> 10.0°x0.75 = 7.5, alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below
Speed of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor
of that parameter.
> Ignore Gyro against COG below Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Speed of Ignore the difference between gyro and COG below a speed of this
value. If the speed is reduced, an increasing difference between
the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a
drift. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against
COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redun-
dant Position Sensor
Factor 1 = value of parameter
Heading/ Ignore Gyro against
COG COG below Speed of
1.0
2 = value of parameter
Full Sensitivity Gyro
against COG above
Speed of
1 2 Speed
Below the speed "1", the difference between gyro and COG is
ignored. A factor is calculated for speed values between "1" and
"2". The difference between gyro and COG is multiplied by this
factor.
Example: Speed 1 = 5 kt, Speed 2 = 20 kt (Nominal Speed)
Difference Gyro/COG = 10°, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5°
- Speed 20 kt: Factor = 1.0 -> 10.0°x1.0 = 10.0, alarm triggered
- Speed 5 kt: Factor = 0.25 -> 10.0°x0.25 = 2.5, no alarm triggered
- Speed 4 kt: Factor = 0 -> 10.0°x0.0 = 0, no alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT
of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that
parameter.
> Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG This parameter is the value "Speed 2" which is shown in the
above speed of diagram above. Usually, the nominal speed of the ship should be
set.
> Speed Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Speed Monitoring functions
> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the
manufacturer’s development or service division. The following
menu items appear only if On is selected.
> Speed against Redundant Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Speed Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed of the redundant speed sensor
(SPD/...LOGx).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 117

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont. )

> Speed against SOG of Main Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Position Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
main position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Speed against SOG of Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).
Redundant Position Sensor Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
redundant position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Position Monitoring Defines the maximum values for the Position Monitoring functions
> On/Off On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the
manufacturer’s development or service division. The following
menu items appear only if On is selected. The following menu item
appears only if On is selected.
> Position against Redundant Set a value in 1 m steps (default = 0 m = Off).
Position Sensor Position monitoring against the position measured by the redundant
position sensor (POS).
> Additional Alarms Setup Menu Select No or Yes (default = No)
Enables the operators menu Alarms > Settings. By means of this
menu the alarms POSITION STATUS CHANGED, LOG STATUS
CHANGED and BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM can be deactivated.
Basic Radar
> Video Anti Clutter Sea Select On or Off (default = On).
This parameter is valid for all radars in the configuration.
> ARPA Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...20.0 NM (default =
19.5 NM)
If an ARPA target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
> AIS Lost Target without Alarm Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...99.0 NM (default =
16.0 NM)
If an AIS target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select None (default) or Turn Headmarker by 180 deg
Turns the Headmarker by 180° caused by an external contact on
TB2/15, 16 on the Interconnection Board (used for double end
ferries).
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn Select Not connected (default) / Double End Ferry, HM Turn
For double end ferries, an external contact at TB2/15,16 deter-
mines whether the AFT or FWD bridge is activated.
The following parameters are visible only, when Double End Ferry,
HM Turn has been set.
FWD Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,
when the FWD bridge has been activated.
AFT Bridge is active String A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,
when the AFT bridge has been activated.
Startup Sensor Selection Defines with which sensors the system works after a startup.
> Heading Select Manual Heading or Heading Sensor 1 (default).
The use of manual heading is not permissible. This setting may
only be used for special purposes, such as exhibitions.
> Speed Select Manual Speed / Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 /
Log 1 (default) or Log 2
> Position Select Estimated Position / Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Position
Sensor 6.
> Time Select Time from Internal Clock / Time from Position Sensor 1
(default) /.../ Time from Position Sensor 6 / Time Sensor 1 or Time
Sensor 2.
The ZDA message of the NMEA definitions is used to transfer the
data.
118 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

> Time from Selected Position Select Yes (default) or No.
Sensor The setting "Yes" overwrites the setting of the parameter Time
from Internal Clock. The time of the currently selected position
sensor is used if "Yes" is selected.
> Differentiated Heading From Selected Heading Sensor is the only available choice.
ROT calculated by differentiation of the heading.
> Default Depth Select Manual Depth / Depth Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Wind Select Manual Wind / Wind Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Weather Select Manual Weather / Weather Sensor 1 (default).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 119

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.7 Radar
Via the Radar menus, the Transceivers and the Display Electronics Units can be configured.
NOTE:
To avoid mistakes caused by different parameter settings originating from various Display Electronics
Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit.
Afterwards, all parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of a
diskette to the other radars or MULTIPILOTs.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
NOTE:
In the menus, the CHARTRADAR 1100 and the MULTIPILOT 1100 are often not mentioned explicitly.
The settings are the same as for the RADARPILOT 1100, except for the menus which are intended espe-
cially for the CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100.
5.11.7.1 Configuration of the Indicators (Administration)
Admini stration
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration
Installed Type of Tracking Facility Select ARPA or EPA (default).
EPA = Electronic Plotting Aid
ARPA = Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
If no ARPA hardware is installed and the parameter is set to
"ARPA", the systems works as an EPA system.
The MULTIPILOT is always an ARPA system.
Connected Monitor Select Other Types (default) or select the type of monitor that is
connected to the Electronics Unit from the list.
Keyboard Select Trackball only (default) / RADAR Keyboard or RADAR +
TRACKPILOT Keyboard.
Name Name of Indicator; enter by virtual keyboard or by ASCII keyboard.
Alarm Relays Activation Delay Enter a value in 1 s steps (default = 30 s), range = 1 s...120 s
Sets the delay for the activation of the alarm relays.
System Fault Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if any system
fault occurs.
Dangerous Target Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if a dangerous
target has been detected, i.e. if the CPA value and the TCPA value
are less than the set values.
Lost Target Alarm Select Disabled (default) / Enabled.
Specifies that the external alarm has to be triggered when a tracked
target is lost.
Guard Zone Alarm Select Disable (default) or Enable.
Specifies that an external alarm must be triggered when a target
has been detected in the guard zone.
120 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Admi nistrati on (cont .)

Allowed to be Sensor Master Select Yes or No (default).
An Indicator can become Sensor Master if the sensors
- Gyro
- Log
- Position
are connected to the RDC of this Indicator, the Analog Interface
(GE3044G207) or the COM Expander.
If these three sensors are connected in redundancy to a second

Indicator, this second Indicator has to be parameterized as sensor
master, too. When such a system is started, the Indicator which
becomes operable first is determined to be sensor master.
In the case of a defect of the sensor master, the second Indicator

becomes the sensor master automatically.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Function Select Available or Not Available (default).
For a RADARPILOT 1100 this parameter defines whether the radar
can be operated as a CHARTRADAR 1100 with a display of elec-
tronic seacharts in the PPI. The User Chart Objects of a connected
CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed without activating
the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
For a MULTIPILOT 1100, this parameter must be set to activate the

full ECDIS functionality.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identifica- Displays the Unique Identification Code of this CHARTRADAR
tion Code 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 unit. Modifications of this number
cannot be saved. The number is used to generate the CHART
Function License Key. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further
information about the procedure.
CHART Function License Key If the correct license key has been entered here, the chart/ECDIS
functionalities can be used at this Indicator. If no valid key is avail-
able, the access to the chart/ECDIS database is locked. See
Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the proce-
dure.
Conning Select Available or Not Available (default).
This parameter defines whether the Conning Display is available or
not. This parameter is available at CHARTRADARs or MULTIPI-
LOTS only. If the CHART Function License Key is not valid, the
Conning functions are not available.
Based on Specification Select IEC 60936-1 (default) or IEC 60936-3.
The approval is based on the IEC specification. If IEC 60936-3 is
selected, the chart cannot be displayed in Head-Up mode and the
chart areas are always filled.
Radar PPI Radius Select Use Default (default) / Standard or Maximize.
Always select Use Default. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s
development or service division.
"Maximize" enlarges the size of the PPI display to fulfil the 16"
radar type approval requirements with the Monitor AZ 3063.
"Standard" shows the PPI in the standard size (which is smaller
than 16" with the Monitor AZ 3063). When "Use Default" is
selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corre-
sponding to the monitor setting Connected Monitor. If a TFT
monitor which requires the maximized display is used together with
CRT monitors, it is possible to configure these CRT monitors with
"Maximize" to get the same display as on the TFT monitor.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 121

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Admini stration (cont.)

Monitor Aspect Ratio Select Use Default / 4/3 or 5/4.
Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturer’s
development or service division.
Monitor resolutions of 1600x1200 or 1024x768 have an aspect ratio

of 4/3. A resolution of 1280x1024 has an aspect ratio of 5/4. CRT
Monitors can display resolutions with both aspect ratios, although
the CRT’s own aspect ratio is usually 4/3. Consequently, if a CRT
Monitor is driven with the resolution of 1280x1024, not the
complete size of the CRT is used and a blank band appears. This
can be corrected by adjusting the screen size settings. As a result
of this "compression" from 5/4 to 4/3, circular objects on the screen
appear slightly oval.
TFT Monitors must be driven with their own 4/3 aspect ratio. When
"Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automati-
cally, corresponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. In
case of the Monitor AZ 3063, the resolution which must be selected
with 1280x1024 by means of the DIP switches on the RDC is auto-
matically processed to a resolution of 1280x960 which corresponds
to an aspect ratio of 4/3.
Head-Up PPI Orientation Select Bow-up (standard) or Stern-up.
Bow-up is the default setting.
The stern-up PPI orientation should be used if the radar monitor is
installed the other way round, so that the operator is watching in
the direction of a stern window.
Monitor Control Interface Select Indicator (COM 1) (default) or RKE (J2).
When a Remote Keyboard Electronics is used, the serial interface
of the monitor can be connected to the RKE or to COM 1 of the
Indicator. The interface which is used must be selected.
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to Select Yes or No (default).
CHARTPILOT Defines whether ARPA alarms like Lost Target and Dangerous
Target are displayed at connected CHARTPILOTs. The alarms
cannot be acknowledged at a CHARTPILOT.
Central Dimming Adjustment Select No (default)/Yes/User Controlled
No: Dimming must be set at every single Indicator.
Yes: Modifications of the dimming settings at one Indicator are
transferred to all other Indicators and they are set if the central
dimming function is enabled at these Indicators.
User Controlled: An additional button is displayed in the Brilliance
menus. By means of this button, the Operator can enable or
disable the central dimming function for the Indicator.
Double End Ferry Select No (default)/Yes, FWD Bridge Indicator/Yes, AFT Bridge
Indicator/Yes, only one Bridge (at Centre)
Defines to which bridge the Indicator belongs (on double end
ferries).
122 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.7.2 Configuration of the Indicator’s Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces)
Serial Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4

Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4
Driver Select None (default) / NMEA183 (IEC 61162-1/2) / C. Plath (serial
Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro).
Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the
driver which has been chosen.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2):
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.
Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.
> Serial Gyro
> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is
connected.
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Display Selected Gyro Select Yes or No (default)
Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch-over unit)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example, PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
> Position
> Position Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL,
GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.
The following items appear only if Position has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel Select 1 /.../ 6 (default = 1).
Channel (multiplexer) identification.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position sensor antenna, position distance (longitudinal) in m rela-
tive to the system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position sensor antenna, position distance (transversal) in m rela-
tive to the system position.
> Sensor Number Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).
Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor
must be supplemented by a serial number, and if so, which number.
The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is

derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred
from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of
the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator
must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection
and in the status display. With the aid of the sensor number func-
tion, it can be arranged, for example, that one GPS system is
consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called
"GPS 2".
> GLL, GGA Selection Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA
message.
Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the
GLL message.
> Use Speed from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the
speed sensor. Set to No for BSH or DNV-W1.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 123

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I nterfaces > Serial I /O 1. ..4 (cont. )

> Use Time from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time
sensor.
> Speed
> Speed Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW,
VHW is connected.
The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.
Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (longitudinal) rela-
tive to system position.
Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (transversal) rela-
tive to system position.
> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter X Constant.
> Transversal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter Y Constant.
> Time
> Time Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is
connected.
The following item appears only if Time has been defined as
Connected:
> Channel Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.
> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output
messages.
> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output TTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output RSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
124 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Seri al Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4 (cont.)

> Output RTE/WPL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> RTE Mode Select: Working Route (default) or Complete Route
Working Route: the last waypoint and the following 4 waypoints are
transmitted.
Complete Route: the complete route with all waypoints is trans-
mitted.
> WPL Remark Select: No Remark (default) or Append Remark
No Remark: the remarks of a waypoint are not transmitted.
Append Remark: the remarks of the waypoint are transmitted.
> RTE Message Route Select: With Track Number (default) or Track Number 0000
Identifier With Track Number: the original number of the system track is
transmitted.
Track Number 0000: the system track is always transmitted with the
number 0000.
> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-
1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
> Depth Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
The following items appear only if Depth has been defined as
Connected:
> Depth Sensor 1 Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Depth Value Select Below Transducer (default) or Below Keel
Below Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT
or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.
> Wind Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
> Channel Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Weather Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
> Channel Weather Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Route Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via
NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not connected if a
CHARTPILOT is connected to the system.
The following items appear only if Route has been defined as
Connected:
> Channel Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4
> Catalog The catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor must be
entered in this input field.
The name will be used by the operator. It is advisable to enter the
name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.
> TRACKPILOT Track Mode Select Disable or Enable
If it is sure that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satis-
factory, it can be admitted for use as a track for the TRACKPILOT.
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz:
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example, via a switch over unit)
are connected to the radar system.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 125

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.7.3 Configuration of the Transceivers
When a Transceiver has been selected, it may happen that it takes a few seconds until the TCU param-
eters have been loaded. A message appears which shows the progress of loading data. If the Indicator
does not make contact with the TCU of the selected Transceiver, a warning appears. In this case, the
parameters shown in the menu do not correspond to the parameters which are actually set in the TCU.
Transceiver > Transceiver 1.. .5

Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5
Type of Generation Select RADAR 1100 S-Band / RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW /
RADAR 1100 X-Band 25 kW
For 1000 Series Transceiver:
> Additional Information Click into the data field and enter any comments.
> Frequency Deviation Enter a value for the constant PRF deviation in the range -5% to
5% (default = 0).
This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence
(interference) between several radars on the ship.
> Sector Blanking (See form sheet on page 305)
> Number of Blanking Sectors Select None / 1 /.../4.
The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking
Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and
Stop Angle. Not allowed for the main navigation radar.
> Blanking Sector X Start Angle Start angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Blanking Sector X Stop Angle Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Antenna
> Speed Capability Select None / Single (Low Speed) / Dual (default) or Single (High
Speed).
Set to Single (High Speed) on HSC.
> Distance Longitudinal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation location of the radar Scanner and
the system position along the ship’s longitudinal axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Distance between the installation position of the radar Scanner and
the system position along the ship’s transverse axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system
position.
> Height above Sea Level Enter the height of the antenna above the sea level in metres, in
0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m)
> Beam Width Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2°,
S-Band = 1.8°.
3 dB points:
5 ft X-Band Scanner:1.5°
8 ft X-Band Scanner:1.0°
14 ft S-Band Scanner:1.8°
126 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Transcei ver > Transceiver 1. .. 5 (cont .)

Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5
> Azimuth Pulses per Revolution X-Band
1. Pulser HEDS-5605 at the intermediate shaft = 1920.0,
2. Modification Kit GR3017G027 with slotted wheel at the interme-
diate shaft = 540.0
3. Combined Azimuth / Headmarker Pulse Generator with slotted
wheel at the hollow shaft = 72.0
S-Band
1. Old pulser (34 teeth chopper wheel) = 830.0
2. New pulser (17 teeth chopper wheel) = 415
See the description of the different azimuth pulse generators in the

technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for further infor-
mation.
> Antenna Motor Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz (default).

> Last Modification Date Displays the date of the last modification of the Transceiver adjust-
ments.
5.11.8 Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander)
By means of the Sensor Interface menu, the optional Analog Interface or the COM Expander can be
configured. The interfaces can only be parameterized if they have been configured in the system layout.
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2
Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2
Sensor Interface 1...2 Click on Sensor Interface 1 or Sensor Interface 2 to configure the
sensor interface as Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface), Interface
Expander or COM Expander.
If the system is equipped with an Interface Expander and an

Analog Interface, the Interface Expander must become the
Sensor Interface 1 (the Interface Expander must be the master,
because it offers additional serial interfaces).
The following menu items Gyro and Pulse Log are available for
the Analog Interface and the Interface Expander only.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 127

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.8.1 Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface
Sensor Int erfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2

Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface
Gyro
> Heading Sensor Channel Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Analog Gyro System Select No Analog Gyro Connected (default) / DC Stepper Positive
/ DC Stepper Negative / DC Positive Halfwave / DC Negative
Halfwave / AC Gyro.
DC Stepper:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal voltage is a smoothed DC voltage.
See Figure 4-20 on page 71 and the description of the LEDs DS
33, 34, 35 in Section 4.5.10.
Halfwave:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal is an unfiltered DC voltage, generated from the 50 Hz or
60 Hz supply voltage.
AC Gyro:
Input indicating that the signal is transferred by means of a
synchro.
> Increment Select 1/6 deg Step (default) / 1/3 deg Step / 1/48 deg Step / 2/3
deg Step (not type-approved).
Matching the gyro interface of the Analog Interface to the transmis-
sion ratio (resolution):
1/6 degree Step:

- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/6 degree course change.
- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 1
degree course change.
1/3 degree Step:
degree course change.
1/48 degree Step:
2/3 degree Step (not approved):
degree course change (90:1).
Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degrada-

tion of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore, this
setting should not be used where:
- the radar installation is intended to meet the IMO/IEC Radar
Performance Standards
- type approval certification is required
- the ARPA option is fitted.
> Reference Select Not Connected (default) / 50 Hz / 60 Hz.
Not Connected must be selected if REF1 and REF2 are not
connected to the Analog Interface.
> Gyro Input Voltage Select Low (default) or High
Sets the gyro input voltage (exciter voltage of the stepper or
maximum stator voltage of the synchro signal). Always select the
"Low" setting. Set to "High" only if it is not possible to get rid of
appearing phase errors. After being set to high, the gyro must be
tested properly while turning.
> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the error input definition.
Pulse Log
> Speed Sensor Channel Select Log1 (default) or Log2.
128 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Distance Longitudinal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position distance (of speed log transducer) (longitudinal) relative to
system position.
> Distance Transversal Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).
Position distance (of speed log transducer) (transversal) relative to
system position.
> Sensor Interface Identifier Select Log (default) / Log 1 / Log 2.
Name of the sensor which is being displayed on the screen.
> Log Type Select No Pulse Log Connected (default) / One Axis Log / Two Axis
Log.
Sets the log type
One Axis Log:
Speed in the longitudinal direction only is transferred (e.g.
DOLOG 21).
Two Axis Log:
Speed in longitudinal and transverse direction is transferred
(e.g. DOLOG 22 or DOLOG 23).
> Increment Select 125 Pulses/NM / 200 Pulses/NM (default).
Resolution in pulses/NM.
> Error Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the error input definition.
> Bottom Track (BT) Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the Bottom Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The BT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The BT status input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
be interpreted as bottom track signals and
- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as bottom track signals and
- the open contact means, that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 129

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Water Track Input (WT) Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the Water Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The WT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The WT status signal input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be
interpreted as water track signals.
not be interpreted as water track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as water track signals.
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as water track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
> XPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the XPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is
transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Speed ahead corresponds to open contact.
> YPM Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the YPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is
transferred for the transverse speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Drift to starboard corresponds to open contact.
> VX Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the VX Input definition, longitudinal speed.
> VY Input Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.
Sets the VY Input definition, transverse speed.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).
Sets the VX Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the longitudinal speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter
of the 1st order).
> Transversal Speed Filter Constant Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).
Sets the VY Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the transverse speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter
of the 1st order).
130 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.8.2 Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

Serial Interface of the Analog Interface
Serial I/O 1 (for Analog Interface)
The following interface types can be parameterized:
Driver Select None (default)/AIS Automatic Ident System or NMEA 0183
(IEC 61162-1/2).
Settings for AIS
> AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Type of AIS Select DEBEG 3400 (default) or Other.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2)
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) or 38400.
> Serial Gyro Select Connected or Not connected (default).
> Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice..
Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch over unit)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
5.11.8.3 Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander
Serial I/O 1...5
The following interface types can be parameterized:
Driver Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) /AIS Automatic
Identification System / Bridge Alarm System BAS 40P
Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the
driver which has been chosen.
The serial I/O 5 can be used as NMEA interface only.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1)
> Baud Rate Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.
Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformant.
> Position
> Position Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL,
GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.
The following items appear only if Position has been defined as

Connected.
> Channel Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position
Sensor 1).
Channel (multiplexer) identification.
Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in
m relative to the system position.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 131

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 (cont.)

Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in
m relative to the system position.
> Sensor Number Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).
Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor
must be supplemented by a serial number and, if so, which
number.
The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is
derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred
from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of
the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator
must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection
and in the status display. The sensor number function can be used
to arrange, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called
"GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".
> GLL, GGA Selection Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA
message.
Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the
GLL message.
> Use Speed from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the
speed sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.
> Use Time from Position Sensor Select Yes or No (default).
The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time
sensor.
> Speed
> Speed Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW,
VHW is connected.
The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as

Connected.
> Channel Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.
Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.
Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.
> Log Type Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter X Constant.
> Transversal Speed Filter Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).
Constant Filter Y Constant.
> Time
> Time Select Connected or Not Connected (default).
Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is
connected.
The following item appears only if Time has been defined as

Connected:
> Channel Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.
> Output The following parameters set the repetition time of the output
messages.
> Output GLL Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DTM Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VTG Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
132 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Output HDT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output OSD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWV Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Wind Reference Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DBT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output ROT Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MWD Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output VBW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MHU Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MMB Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTA Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output MTW Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Serial Output used as Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 61162-
1/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:
> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) Select Connected or Not Connected
The following item appears only if the Bridge Alarm System 1 has
been defined as Connected.
> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier Select a number from 1...31
The identifier usually corresponds to the number of the Bridge
Alarm System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20
alarm inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes.
The Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs
each.
5.11.9 AIS
See Section 5.4 from page 93 on for the connection and configuration of an AIS.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 133

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.10 NACOS
(Not available for standard radar systems)

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT Electronics
Unit and in the RDC. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters from the
TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and compares them with the parameters which are stored in
the RDC. If the parameters are different, a dialogue box appears and it must be decided whether the set
of parameters from the RDC is to be loaded into the TRACKPILOT or vice versa.
ztr1_188.gif
Fig. 5-16 TRACKPILOT configuration manager
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the Configure
menus and/or in the Service menus. While performing the setting-to-work, the settings should be
performed in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any
menus and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT
immediately, and so the Service menus should be used during trials.
For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE), see the technical manual
of the TRACKPILOT.
5.11.11 Planning System

> Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets
Select the Indicator from which the CHARTPILOT should get the ARPA targets.
> Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT
Select True or False (default)
Defines whether the sensor information is transferred to the CHARTPILOT via Ethernet.
134 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> C-Map Identifier

Displays the C-Map Identifier of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.
> ARCS User Permit Number
Displays the ARCS User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-
PILOT.
> ENC User Permit No.
Displays the ENC User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHART-
PILOT.
> Security Unique Identifier (UID)
Displays the status information for the UID (UID existing, date and time of storage).
5.11.12 Conning
The Conning functions are available at a CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100 or CONNINGPILOT
1100.
By means of these parameters, the display of the conning data is configured. To use the Conning func-
tionalities, some settings are necessary at the CHARTPILOT. See the technical manual of the CHART-
PILOT 1100 (NACOS xx-5) for further information. The parameters are available only if the parameter
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration > Conning has been set to Available. If
no correct CHARTRADAR Function Licence Key has been entered, the conning display does not work.
Conning
Configure > Conning
Shaft Parameters
> Number of Shafts Select None (default)/1 Shaft/2 Shafts
The following items appear only if the parameter Number of Shafts
has not been defined as None.
> Scale RPM Bar Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM)
The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable
maximum value.
> Scale Rudder Display Select 25° (default)/50°/75°
The scaling of the "Rudder Display" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
> Number of Clutches Select None (default)/1 Clutch....6 Clutches
Defines the number of clutches.
> Clutch Label Select Yes or No
Defines whether the clutch symbols are shown with a label or not.
> Display Power Bar Select Yes or No
Defines whether the power bar is displayed or not.
> Display Pitch Bar Select Yes or No
Defines whether the pitch bar is displayed or not.
Scale Off Course Bar Select Auto (default)/5°/15°/30°/50°
The scaling of the display "Off Course Deviation Bar" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Off Track Bar Select Auto (default)/50 m/100 m/250 m/500 m/1000 m
The scaling of the "Off Track Deviation Bar (XTD)" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar Select 10 kt/15 kt/20 kt/25 kt (default)/30 kt/35 kt/40 kt
The scaling of the "Longitudinal Scale Bar" (longitudinal speed) is
defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 135

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Conni ng ( cont. )
Configure > Conning
Display Power Bar Select MW Scale (default) or % Scale
Scaling of the power bar with % or MW.
Scale Shaft Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/
30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Shaft Power Bar" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
Generator Parameters
Number of Generators Select None/1 Generator...6 Generators
The following item appears depending on the setting of the param-

eter Number of Generators. If Number of Generators has been
set to None, no parameter is available.
> Scale Generator Power Bar Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/
30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Generator Power Bar" is defined by selection of
the suitable maximum value.
Availability of Additional Displays
> Display Weather Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual weather display is avail-
able
> Display Draught Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual draught display is avail-
able
> Display Consumption Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual consumption display is
available
> Display Generator Power 1 Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual generator power display is
available (Norcontrol interface)
available (analog and ISL interface)
> Remaining Power Displayed Select Yes or No (default)
as Used Power Defines whether the analog input for the remaining power is inter-
preted as input for the used power.
available (NMEA interface)
Displacement Table The displacement table should be used only, if the values for the
displacement have been calculated by the yard. If no values are
available, the table should not be filled in.
> Draught 1...10 Set the draught values in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m)
> Displacement 1...10 Set the displacement value to the corresponding draught value in
1 t steps (default = 0 t)
Squat Coefficient The squat coefficient should be filled in only, if the value has been
calculated by the yard. If no value is available, the default value 1.5
must be used.
136 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Conning (cont. )
Configure > Conning
Azimuth Thruster Parameters
> Azimuth Thruster 1...4
> Azimuth Thruster x For Azimuth Thruster 1:
Bow Select Not connected / Stern Thruster / Stern Starboard Thruster
midship - Ships with a stern midshp AZT: select Stern Thruster
- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Starboard Thruster;
3 AZT 2 must be set to Stern Port Thruster.
For Azimuth Thruster 2:

Select Not connected / Stern Port Thruster
- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Port Thruster;
AZT 1 must be set to Stern Starboard Thruster.
1 2 1 2 1 For Azimuth Thruster 3:
Stern Stern Stern Select Not Connected / Bow Midship Thruster / Bow Starboard
port starboard
Bow Bow Behind Before Thruster / Center Thruster / Behind Center Thruster
port starboard Center center center - Ships with one additional bow AZT: select Bow Midship
Thruster.
- Double end ferries with four main AZTs: select Bow Starboard
4 3 Thruster.
4 - Ships with one additional center AZT: select Center Thruster.
3 - Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:
3 select Behind Center Thruster.
ztr1 654.eps
AZT 4 must be set to Before Center Thruster.

2 1 2 1 2 1
For Azimuth Thruster 4:
Select Not connected / Bow Port Thruster / Before Center Thruster
- Double end ferries with for main AZTs: select Bow Port
Thruster.
- Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:
select Before Center Thruster.
AZT 3 must be set to Behind Center Thruster.
> Add a Label (Number) to the Select No (default) or Yes.
Thruster Display The number is added automatically and cannot be edited.
> Add a Propeller to the Thruster Select No (default) / Pushing Propeller or Pulling Propeller.
Display Defines what kind of symbol for a propeller is added to the thruster
display.
> Thruster Angle Display Mode Select 0 to 360° (default) or ±180°.
Defines whether the thruster angle is displayed in a range of
0...360° or ±180°.
> Thruster Angle Display Color Select No (default)/Red if Angle & RPM are positive/Green if Angle
& RPM are positive
Defines whether the thruster angle values are displayed colored
and the display colour for positive values of Angle and RPM.
> Colored Angle Display Limit Enter a value in 1° steps (default = 1°).
Input of the thruster angle at which the colour changes from white
to red/green if the parameter Thruster Angle Display Coloured is
set to Yes.
> Scale Orientation Select 0° up (default) or 180° up.
Defines the orientation of the azimuth thruster scale.
> Maximum Thruster RPM Maximum value for the scale in revolutions per minute.
> Maximum Thruster Power Maximum value for the scale in MW.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 137

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.11.13 ECDIS
The ECDIS menu is available only if at least one MULTIPILOT 1100 has been defined in the System
Layout menus.
ECDI S
Configure > ECDIS > Chart Database
ENC Database
> ENC Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the ENC database is available
ARCS Database
> ARCS Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the ARCS database is available
C-MAP CM93/2 Database
C-MAP CM93/2 Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the CM93/2 database is available
C-MAP CM93/3 Database
C-MAP CM93/3 Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the CM93/3 database is available
Direct ENC Database
Direct ENC Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the Direct ENC database is available
Own Database
Own Database Select Yes (default) or No
Defines whether the Own database is available
5.11.14 VDR
See Section 5.5 from page 97 on for the connection and configuration of a VDR.
138 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.12 Service Menu
5.12 Service Menu
The Service register offers the possi-

bility of making adjustments while the
radar is in operation. The settings which
can be made by means of the
Configure register are the basic
settings. Tree
For the first-time setting-to-work, it is
necessary to keep to a particular
order when making the adjustments.
The order is shown in Section 6 on
page 157.
The tree shows all available submenus.
By clicking on a + symbol, the tree is
expanded and the + becomes a -. By
ztr1_135.gif
clicking on -, the tree is compressed

again.
Service menu
To make the complete PPI visible for measurements and

adjustments, the main window of the System Maintenance
Manager is closed if a submenu has been selected. A dialogue
box is opened on the right-hand side of the screen. This
dialogue box contains an input field for the parameter value(s)
and a display field which shows important existing settings and
measurement values. By means of the list box, selöect the Display field
parameter which is to be adjusted.
To return to the System Maintenance Manager, this dialogue
box must be closed. Input fields
Parameter
selection
ztr1_136.gif
Dialogue box for transceiver adjustments

(example MBS)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 139

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12 Service Menu Technical Manual
5.12.1 Indicator
5.12.1.1 Monitor Adjust
The monitor can be adjusted by means of an on-screen display. The

size of the monitor is displayed. With the buttons Up and Down, first
the OSD menu of the monitor is opened, then the parameter can be
selected. With + and - the values can be set. Depending on the radar
version, the monitors and the handling of their OSD menus are
different. Some types are equipped with a switch "OSM / RS232". If it
is necessary to operate the monitor with its own buttons or to adjust
"Brilliance", the switch must be set to "OSM". To be able to operate the
on-screen menus by means of the radar service menus, the switch
must be set to "RS232".
If the display color, the brightness or contrast are not correct or if there
are differences between monitors in one system, the monitor default
settings could be wrong. See Section 8.2.7 on page 184 for further
information.
ztr1_137.gif
Monitor Adjust dialogue box
5.12.1.2 RDC Service and Adjust
The RDC Service and Adjust offers facilities for an automatic

adjustment of the video offsets and tools for the advanced diagnosis
of the TVA signal.
Usually, only the ADC Threshold function is used for the setting-to-
work of the radar. The other functions are advanced tools for diag-
nosis in case of problems.
ztr1_026.gif
RDC Service and Adjust
140 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
ADC Threshold Adjust (Video and ARPA Offset)

The following adjustment must be performed at every Indicator for all
Transceivers.
1. The Transceiver must be selected (same way as in the normal
operational mode).
2. The Transceiver must be switched on and operated as master.
3. The Auto button must be clicked once. The values are meas-
ured and saved automatically (PPI video offset, ARPA video
offset, GND reference).
4. The procedure must be repeated for all other Transceivers in the
system.
It is possible to modify the values manually. The effect on the radar
video can be watched in the PPI. The values can be reset to the
currently saved values by means of the Revert button. It is strongly
advised to use the values which have been determined by means of
the automatic measurement function.
ztr1_027.gif
RDC Service and Adjust
A/Polar-Scope-Display
The scope functionality can be used to display the TVA signal as in
an oscilloscope.
In A-scope mode, the video signal is displayed in an x/y system of
coordinates. The y-axis shows the video amplitude, the X-axis the
distance of the target. The parameters are the azimuth for the display
and the range. It is possible to set the range and the azimuth by
ztr1_028.gif
means of VRM and EBL 1 or 2. The resolution of the Y-axis can be

modified.
A/Polar Scope Display
In polar scope mode, the TVA signal is displayed in a circular mode.
The azimuth of the displayed signals corresponds to the azimuth of the targets. The length of the signal
corresponds to the strength of the signal.
The ARPA PPI function shows the video signal which is used for the ARPA processing with the fixed
range of 20 NM.
Status displays
The status displays have the following meanings:
TRIGGER: green = trigger signal measured, red = no trigger system, insensitive = undefined
RDC SEA: green = Video STC on, insensitive = Video STC off
ARPA ON: green = ARPA working, insensitive = ARPA not working
VIDEO: green = video signals are transmitted to the main processor
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 141

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.1.3 Check RDC Alarm IO
To check the function of the alarm relay, click on the buttons. The colour of the
activated buttons changes and the selected relay is activated.
The correct operation of the relays can be measured at the terminals of the
Interconnection Board.
The Indicators Ack Buzzer (In 1) and External Input (In 2) show whether an
alarm signal is active at the alarm inputs of the RDC.
ztr1_187.gif
5.12.1.4 Serial I/O Monitor
By means of the Serial I/O monitor, the data

communication between the 4 serial inter-
faces of the RDC or the 5 se
rial interfaces of the COM Expander and the
connected ship’s sensors can be monitored
and saved on a diskette. To monitor the
serial interfaces of the COM Expander, the
Indicator to which the COM Expander is
connected must be the sensor master. The
interface driver must have been configured
beforehand (Section 5.11.7.2). The interface
must be selected by means of the list box. By
means of the buttons Rx and Tx, it must be
ztr1_077.gif
selected whether the outgoing or the

incoming signals are monitored. If the button
Start is clicked, the data is read and Serial I/O Monitor
displayed in the display field. If the button
Clear is clicked, the display field is cleared. The protocol can be saved to a diskette by clicking on Save
to Disk. Existing protocol files on the diskettes will be overwritten.
142 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.1.5 Software Update (+PCBs)
RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100:

The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,
COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a diskette
drive. Five diskettes (GE3062G004, Order No. 390001277) are
needed:
- Flash Update Facility Boot Disk
- Flash Update Distribution Disk 1 of 4
To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry
out the instructions on the screen. After the boot diskette has been
inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The
ztr1_138.gif
boot sequence is modified automatically for a diskette boot (no DIP

switches need to be set for the boot sequence). All other diskettes are
requested by messages on the screen.
After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to the normal operation and the
radar must be switched off and then on again to reboot.
MULTIPILOT 1100:
The system’s software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,
COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a CD-ROM.
The CD ROM RP3065G010 (Order No. 390001627) is needed.
To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry
out the instructions on the screen. After the CD ROM has been
inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The
boot sequence is modified automatically for a CD ROM boot (no DIP
switches need to be set for the boot sequence).
After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set
to normal operation and the MULTIPILOT must be switched off and
then on again to reboot.
zmp1_138.gif
NOTE:
- The pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander/Analog Interface are automatically updated during the
process.
- The TCU and the Analog Interface must not be updated at the same time from different Indicators.
This could cause problems on the CAN bus and the TCU could be set to an undefined status (and
would have to be exchanged in this case).
- In a NACOS, the software versions of all components must belong to the same NACOS software
version. See the product notes for further information about SW upgrade kits.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 143

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.1.6 PCB Software Update
During a system software update, the pcbs TCU, RDC, Analog Interface and COM Expander are also
updated with the relevant software version. If one of these pcbs has been exchanged, it must be checked
for the correct software version. With the function PCB Software Update, the following pcbs are checked
for a valid software version and updated if necessary:
- TCU (all TCUs in the system)
- RDC
- Analog Interface (if connected)
- COM Expander (if connected)
It must be ensured that the mains switches of all other electronics units are switched off before the check/
update is started.
To start the check/update, the OK button must be clicked. The system will reboot when the update has
been finished.
5.12.1.7 RKE Software Update
By means of this function, it is possible to update the software of the Remote Keyboard Electronics unit
(KBC pcb GE3048G200 with software version A or newer. For the determination of the software version,
see Section 5.10.2). The instructions on the screen must be followed.
Insert the update diskette and click on OK to start the update or click on Cancel to exit the update
routine. If the update is started, every connected Remote Keyboard Electronics is checked for the current
software version. An update is performed only, if necessary.
NOTE:
The update lasts about 8 minutes for the master Remote Keyboard Electronics unit. After the master has
been updated, the slaves are updated automatically. The update for each slave takes about 35 s. It is
definitely advisable not to use any Operating Unit in the system during the update. If the system is oper-
ated by means of the Operating Units during the update, it may happen that the update of the Remote
Keyboard Electronics currently being updated is restarted.
In case of any failure during the update, the message Software Update failed at RKE=x will be
displayed and the update must be repeated.
The Display Electronics Unit must be restarted after the successful software update. The correct software
update can be checked by means of the Telemonitoring Data menu.
5.12.1.8 RKE Settings
This menu appears only, if an RKE is connected.

By means of the RKE (Remote Keyboard Electronics) settings, the type of monitor connected can be
defined. This is necessary for the monitor driver settings (important for ECDIS) and the OSD monitor
adjustments (function Monitor Adjust) which can be performed also at the slave Operating Unit.
All RKEs of the system can be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit. The RKE to be parame-
terized must be selected from the Selected RKE listbox. The RKE which is connected directly to the
operated electronics unit, usually the master, is marked by means of a "*".
The display window below the listbox shows the number and the status of the selected RKE.
144 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
The type of monitor can be selected by means of the Monitor Type (Control Protocol) listbox. If the
parameter Other types (Use RKE DIP Switch) is selected, the settings of the DIP switch on the RKE
pcb are valid. Any other setting (including the setting None) of the listbox overwrites the setting of the
DIP switch. For further information on the DIP switch, see the technical manual of the Remote Keyboard
Electronics.
NOTE:
In master/slave installations, the RKE of the master must be configured with None and the DIP switch
must be set to "no monitor", because the serial interface of the monitor is usually connected to the Display
Electronics Unit and not to the RKE. See also the parameter Monitor Control Interface.
5.12.1.9 Start Program (Diskette)
Starts maintenance/service programs from a diskette if available.
5.12.2 Transceiver
The Transceiver Adjust settings replace many adjustments which can also be performed by means of
the potentiometers on the Modulator or TCU boards.
5.12.2.1 Setting-to-Work
> Headmarker
Display field: Antenna Speed
Input field: Headmarker correction angle ±180°
The headmarker of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted in 0.1° steps by means of the
↑↓ buttons. To store the values, click Save. The headmarker cannot be adjusted mechanically. It
can be adjusted in the complete range (±180°) by software.
Adjust the headmarker by modifying the value in the input field. A target at a distance of 2...4 NM
must appear on the PPI with the same azimuth as detected visually. The headmarker adjustment
must be performed with the Scanner in both speeds if available (dual speed Antenna Unit is
optional).
> Trigger Delay
Display field: No information available
Input field: Value for the Trigger Delay 0...150
The trigger delay of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted by means of the ↑↓ buttons.
To store the values, click Save. The trigger delay performs the correction of the range error. Adjust
the trigger delay by modifying the value in the input field. Targets at a known distance must be
displayed with the correct distance on the PPI. If no targets are available, straight lines near the ship
must be displayed correctly.
> STC Delay
Display field: Range, Status
Input field: STC Delay
The STC delay adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. The radar must be switched on and the SEA indicator must be set to 0%. Adjust the STC
delay so that the main bang largely disappears but the video starts immediately after the main bang.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 145

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
If the main bang is too large, the antenna matching and the RF installation must be checked, and
corrected if necessary.
> Video MBS
Display field: Range, Status
Input fields: MBS Amplitude, MBS Delay
Before the Video MBS adjustment is started, the trigger delay and STC delay adjustments must have
been performed. The main bang should be mostly suppressed by the STC adjustment. If the main
bang is still visible, it can be suppressed with the Video MBS adjust.
The video MBS adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. Set SEA to 100% and adjust the centre area without loss of targets.
> PMA Display
Display field: No information available
Input fields: PMA Display Start and PMA Display End
Defines the sector for the measurement of the Performance Monitor Amplitude. The default values
are 270°...90°. These values depend on the alignment of the Gearbox. The sector should be defined
as 180° wide. It must start with the azimuth value 90° before the azimuth of the beam when it lies
at right angles over the plastic window in the outer surface of the Gearbox. The window covers the
microwave detector diode. The sector must end 90° behind the beam azimuth.
ztr1_172.eps
Fig. 5-17 PMA Display
146 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> PM Adjust
Before the PM settings are made, it is necessary to adjust the performance monitor oscillator. The
TCU allows the adjustment by means of the input field PM Tuning as described below.
Display field No information available
Input field: PM Tuning buttons for PMV Adj and PMA Adj
1. Performance Monitor Oscillator
- Select the 24 NM range.
- Switch AFC OFF!
- Tune the video display to the maximum.
- Switch the performance monitor on.
- Generate a strong noise by means of GAIN.
- Adjust the PM signal by means of alternating adjustment of PM Tuning and reduction of
GAIN (reduce the brightness of the inner circle by means of GAIN until it is only faintly
visible and tune it to maximum brightness by means of PM Tuning; repeat as long as the
circle can be made visible by means of PM Tuning).
2. Start the measurement of the performance monitor video level by clicking on PMV Adj.
3. Performance Monitor Amplitude:
- If possible, switch off all other radars.
- Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.
PMA (16 NM)
PMV (6 NM)
ztr1_025.eps
Fig. 5-18 Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 147

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.2.2 Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation)
> Magnetron
Note:
If the Modulator has been changed, a temporary
setting for the magnetron current must be
performed as soon as the radar is switched on
again. Follow the instructions for the exchange of
the Modulator in the technical manual of the Gear-
boxes/Transceivers.
Note:
Before an adjustment or a check of the magnetron
current, the Transceiver should have been working
for about 20 mins in the 12 NM range.
ztr1_653.gif
Adjustment:
The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected,
the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start the
adjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is
shown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button.
Usually, it is not necessary and definitely not advisable to modify the values of Imag1, Imag2
and Pulse Length Control manually when the automatic adjustment has been performed. All
ranges should be checked. Only when in ranges ≤1.5 NM the value of Actual Current is below
5 A and/or the display of the targets is not satisfactory, can the pulse length be increased care-
fully step by step. If the value of Actual Current is higher than 11 A in the 0.75 NM and 1.5 NM
range, the pulse length can be decreased. Manual modifications must be saved.
Note:
For short pulse lengths (ranges ≤1.5 NM), a deviation of ±30% between actual and nominal magne-
tron current is tolerable. A deviation of -60%...+30% is tolerable in ranges of ≤3.0 NM.
CAUTION
Check the magnetron current (Actual) while modifying Imag1 manually.
The "Actual" value should not exceed the "Nominal" value.
The values of the heating voltage and the bias are shown for information only. The displayed heating
voltage is different from the voltage which can be measured at the Modulator. See the description of the
Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for information in detail.
148 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
> Tuning Offset

Display field No information available
Input field: Tuning Offset
To adjust the tuning offset, switch the radar on and
select the 12 NM range. Set the operator’s Tuning
indicator on the display to 50%. ztr1_165.cdr
By modifying the tuning offset value in the input field,

the tuning indication bar must be adjusted to maximum length.
Tuning Indication Gain
If modifications of the tuning adjustment causes only small deflections of the tuning indicator, it might
be difficult to find the maximum adjustment. In this case it is possible to increase the deflections by
means of a higher gain.
The following values proved to be practical:
Range 0.75 NM = 3, range 1.5 NM = 1.5, ranges 3, 6, 12 NM = 1.0
Default value is 1.0.
> STC Compensation
This parameter is visible only, if the parameter Video Anti Clutter Sea is set to off.
Input fields: Amplitude, Length
To adjust the STC Compensation, select the 12 NM range. Set SEA to maximum and adjust GAIN
in a way that the noise is clearly visible.
The default settings are:
Amplitude: 30
Length (X-Band): 60
Length (S-Band): 40
Check that, at the end of the STC-affected area, neither a noise ring nor a dark ring appears. If
necessary, correct by means of Length.
5.12.2.3 Magnetron Hours
The function Magnetron Hours shows the working hours of the magnetron. The counter can be reset by
means of the Reset button.
5.12.2.4 Antenna Information
The function Antenna Info shows information about the rotary frequency of the Scanner. It displays the
status of the radar, the existing speed and pulse count of the Scanner, and the minimum and maximum
pulse counts.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 149

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.12.3 Interswitch
By means of the button Input Adjust On/Off

the Interswitch (PCI) can be switched to the
service mode for the adjustment of the TVA
inputs. This function can be used only if an
Interswitch has been configured in the
system layout. If no Interswitch is available,
the message Not configured appears in the
data field.
If the Interswitch has been switched to the
service mode, a corresponding warning
message appears on all Indicators. For the
adjustments of the Interswitch, see the Inter-
switch service manual.
ztr1_145.gif
Interswitch menu
5.12.4 NACOS

The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT electronics
unit and in the IDE memory module. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters
from the TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and a small dialogue box is opened next to the PPI.
For the TRACKILOT, the parameters are split up into the groups User
Parameters, System Parameters and Special Parameters. By means of
the check box Trial Run, a trial program is started which helps to determine
the controller coefficients.
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be
performed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. During
setting-to-work, the settings should be performed in the Configure menus.
During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menus
and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box
affects the TRACKPILOT immediately and so these menus should be used
ztr1_189.cdr
during trials.
For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTER-
FACE), see the technical manual of the TRACKPILOT. TRACKPILOT service menu
150 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.13 Commissioning Data Menu
5.13 Commissioning Data Menu
NOTE:
It is advisable to parameterize the entire system always at one and the same Display Electronics Unit
and to transfer the parameters to the other Display Electronics Units subsequently. In this way, it is
possible to prevent an incomplete set of parameters from being transferred to a Display Electronics Unit
with an complete set of parameters, which is then overwritten.
Config Transfer
It is possible to store parameters which have been entered on one Indicator to a second Indicator (or to
all Indicators) without the use of diskettes. In this way, it is possible to parameterize all radars of a system
at one Indicator. By means of the function Transmit, the parameters can be transferred to the selected
Indicator via CAN bus (or stored on a diskette). By means of the function Receive, it is possible to load
the parameters from a selected Indicator (or to load them from a diskette).
The function Transmit writes the files
R10k.sam (configuration file),
R10kcom.rep (commissioning report),
version.txt (list of versions; only if a
backup onto a floppy disk is
performed) and errorhist.txt (list of
errors; only if a backup onto a floppy
disk is performed) onto a diskette or
stores it to the selected Indicator. By
clicking on Transfer, the backup of the
files starts.
If the files version.txt and/or
errorhist.txt have not been generated
so far, this is performed automatically
when the transfer is started.
Existing files on a diskette are over-
ztr1_146.gif
written (a warning will appear). When

changes in the configuration have
been performed, the parameters Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Transfer
should be saved on the "Configuration
Backup" diskettes.
NOTE:
If the configuration file R10k.sam has been sent to another Indicator,
ztr1_141.gif it does not automatically replace the existing configuration of the
Indicator. A warning appears at that Indicator. This warning cannot
be acknowledged. The Indicator must be restarted to take over the new configuration and to acknowledge
the warning.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 151

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.13 Commissioning Data Menu Technical Manual
The function Receive loads the config-

uration files from the selected Indicator
or from the diskette to the operated
Indicator. Ensure that these parame-
ters are valid. Click on Transfer to
start the restorage of the files.
The parameters are not taken over
automatically. The warning New Indi-
cator Config File appears. This
warning cannot be acknowledged. To
take over the parameters and to
acknowledge the warning, the Indicator
must be restarted.
ztr1_148.gif
Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Receive
If a TRACKPILOT is connected, the R10k.sam file can be transferred also to the TRACKPILOT (but not
received from the TRACKPILOT). The file contains the parameters for the conning display. The
R10k.sam file is also transferred to the TRACKPILOT, when "All Indicators" has been selected. The
parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE itself cannot be transferred by means of the
Config Transfer function. This must be performed by means of the Configuration menus.
Service Report
It is important to note what work has
been done at what time. The service
report has to be filled in after each item
of repair or maintenance work. Click on
Service Report to view the service
reports which have been filled in so far.
ztr1_147.gif
Commissioning Data menu
152 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings
5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings
The following instructions are valid for the motherboard DFI CA64. If different motherboards are used, this
section will be extended.
NOTE:
To perform the BIOS settings, a PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector must be connected at the Display
Electronics Unit instead of the Radar Keyboard.
5.14.1 Entering the BIOS Setup Menu
It is necessary to connect a PC keyboard with

a PS/2 connector to the motherboard. Other-
wise it is not possible to operate the BIOS
Setup menu.
The keyboard must be connected by means of
the PS/2 connector in the same way as the
ztr1_173.jpg
Radar Keyboard (see Section 4.5.3 on page 49

or Section 4.5.9 on page 64).
If the radar is equipped with a Radar Keyboard, Fig. 5-19 Soft power switch of the motherboard
this must be disconnected beforehand.
1. Connect the keyboard as described above.
2. The motherboard has a soft power switch. This switch is enabled in the BIOS settings of a new
board or a board which is configured with the default settings (e.g. after battery exchange). In this
case, close ATX-SW (DFI CA61/CB61/CA64) by means of a jumper, switch on the Display Elec-
tronics Unit by means of the monitor power switch and remove the jumper. With the BIOS settings
described below, the soft power switch will be disabled and from then on, the system can be started
without the jumper. If the system starts without the use of the jumper, the BIOS is not configured
with the default settings.
3. While the system is starting up, press Del until the BIOS Setup menu appears.
NOTE:
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started by means of the monitor power switch. If the
BIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start when the monitor is switched on.
5.14.2 Procedure
To set the correct parameters, first load the default settings and then modify only the parameters which
are different from the default settings.
In the following description, only the parameters which have to be modified are mentioned. All other
parameters must be left at their default values.
5.14.3 Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus
The operation of the BIOS Setup menus is described by means of the help function of the software and/
or help texts which are displayed on the screen, depending on the selected submenu or parameter. The
operation of the BIOS Setup menus might be different for the various motherboards.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 153

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings Technical Manual
For the navigation in the menus, the keys PgUp, PgDn, the cursor keys and the Enter key must be used.
Some entries must be confirmed by means of the Y key. If the keyboard which is used for the parame-
terization is not a US version, it might be possible that the Y key is not at the correct position. In this
case, the button has to be used which is at the position of the Y key on a standard US PC keyboard.
After the values have been modified, the modifications must be saved before the BIOS Setup menus are
exited. The system is then rebooted automatically.
5.14.4 Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64
Loading the Default Settings

Select LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS with the cursor keys and confirm.
All parameters are now set to the default values. The parameters which have to be set differently from
the default values are described in the following tables.
Parameters which have to be set differently from the Default Settings

First set the current time and date (UTC). Then modify the following parameters in the submenus:
BIOS Settings for DFI CA64
Submenu Parameter Setting
STANDARD CMOS FEATURES Drive A 1.44M, 3.25 in
Halt On All, But Disk/Key
ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES Virus Warning Disabled 1)
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled 1)
First Boot Device SCSI
RADAR/CHARTRADAR: Floppy
Second Boot Device MULTIPILOT: CDROM
Third Boot Device HDD-0
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled 1)
ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES OnChip USB Disabled
INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS IDE Primary Prefetch Disabled
OnChip Sound 2) Disable
Onboard Legacy Audio 2) Disable
Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP PWR Lost Resume State Turn On
PNP/PCI CONFIGURATION Resources controlled by Auto (ESCD)
Assign IRQ for USB Disabled
1) Is the default setting, please check

2) For motherboards with sound option only
154 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 5.15 Upgrade Kits
5.15 Upgrade Kits
Switch off the power supply to the system before starting the installation process!
5.15.1 Analog Interface Kit
The Analog Interface kit consists of the following components:

- Analog Interface pcb (HS10-SIR10T)
- Mains cable to the Interconnection Board
- Data cable to the Interconnection Board
- 4 screws M3x6
To install the Analog Interface, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. Ensure, that the gyro is switched
off! The gyro power supply is independent of the radar power supply. The pcb must be installed in the
Interconnection Box.
The installation steps are as follows:
1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the
2. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided next to the Interconnection Board.
3. Connect the power supply cable to J7 of the Interconnection Box and to TB50 (N), TB51 (L1) and
TB52 (PE) of the Analog Interface pcb. See Section 4.5.10 on page 68 for a description of the
Analog Interface and its terminals.
4. Remove the four jumpers from J5 of the Interconnection Board and connect the data cable to J5 of
the Interconnection Board and to J7 of the Analog Interface.
5. Connect the gyro or log.
6. Close the housing.
7. Start the system and set the parameters for the Analog Interface by means of the System Mainte-
nance Manager. See Section 5.6 from page 98 on for information about the System Maintenance
Manager.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 155

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
5.15 Upgrade Kits Technical Manual
5.15.2 RGB Buffer Kit
The RGB Buffer kit consists of the following components:

- RGB Buffer pcb
- Flat cable to the Interconnection Board
- Monitor cable to the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP) in the Display Electronics Unit
- 4 screws M3x30
- 4 threaded bolts
To install the RGB Buffer, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Inter-
connection Box.
The installation steps are as follows:
1. Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the
2. Insert the threaded bolts to replace the four screws from the holes shown in Figure 4-17 on page 65.
3. Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided, as shown on page 64.
4. Connect the flat cable to J6 of the Interconnection Board and to J1 of the RGB Buffer pcb. See
Section 4.5.13 for a description of the RGB Buffer and its terminals.
5. Connect the monitor cable to J2 of the RGB Buffer and to the VGA connector of the GVP unit in the
6. Close the housing.
7. Connect the monitor to J3 and the slave monitor to J4 of the RGB Buffer.
8. Check the DIP switches for correct 75 Ω termination (usually a termination is not necessary, because
the monitor itself is terminated).
9. Start the system. Further software settings are not necessary.
If more than three monitors are needed, the 5 Channel Video Switch SH3023 must be used.
156 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 6 Setting-To-Work Guide
Technical Manual 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components
6 Setting-To-Work Guide
The following instructions will guide you through the first setting-to-work of a RADARPILOT/CHAR-
TRADAR 1100 or the radar components of a MULTIPILOT 1100. The workflow description below does
not contain all necessary information for the setting-to-work but it shows the correct sequence of all
settings and adjustments and it gives cross references to the relevant sections in this manual where you
can find information in detail. Settings and adjustments which must be performed by means of the System
Maintenance Manager software are described by means of help texts which appear after a few seconds
when the cursor is placed over a button or which can be called by means of the button.
Section 6.2, E x a m p l e o f t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a D u a l I n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a C H A R T P I L O T , shows the most
important configuration parameter settings of a dual installation in detail.
6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components
1. Cabling and Installation

The mechanical installation and the cabling of a radar system must be planned by means of the manu-
facturer’s outline drawings and cabling documents. It is not possible to carry out the installation in a
reasonable way without such preparations. The cabling documents describe most of the possible
versions of the system installation. It is advisable to read the general remarks and the remarks printed
on the plans. The outline drawings also contain drawings of components which may not be included in
the delivery of your system. The installation and cabling work must be performed by competent persons.
2. Preparations
The following checks and settings must be performed before the mains supply to the system is switched
on:
- Check whether the mains selector switches are set correctly (Interconnection Board,
mains input unit of the Transceiver).
- Check whether the power supply for the Antenna Unit has been connected correctly.
- Set the Transceiver No. on the TCU pcb by means of the DIP switch 1. See DIP switch 1
description in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. For a single installa-
tion, set the Transceiver No. to "1".
- Set the indicator No. on the RDC pcb by means of the DIP switch. See the DIP switch
description on page 53. For a single installation, set the indicator No. to "1". The indicator
No. and transceiver No. of one and the same radar must be identical.
- The correct jumper settings for the X-/S-Band version and the transmitter power should be
set ex works.
3. CAN Bus Termination
For further information, see Section 4.3 on page 42. The radar may work without termination but it
is highly advisable to install the termination to guarantee undisturbed functioning in all environ-
mental conditions.
4. Ethernet Network Termination
If the system has an Ethernet network, the cabling must be performed in accordance with the advice
in Section 4.5.8 on page 62.
Now switch on the power to the system.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 157

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6 Setting-To-Work Guide RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components Technical Manual
5. System Layout and Configuration of Subsystems

The system layout of the entire system must be defined by means of the System Maintenance
Manager. The parameterization and subsequent modifications should be performed always at one
and the same Indicator. See Section 5.11 on page 112 for general hints about the menu handling proce-
dure, and, see Section 5.11.5 on page 114 for further information about entering the system layout.
If the system layout has been entered, only the relevant subsystems remain in the menu tree and have
to be configured:
- Indicator
Configure each available Indicator (e.g. type of monitor/keyboard) by means of the
Administration menus. See the hints in Section 5.11.6.
- Transceiver
Configure each Transceiver by loading the factory-defined parameters from the available
TCUs. This is the precondition for the transceiver adjustment (see 6, T r a n s c e i v e r A d j u s t -
m e n t s ). Do not press the Save button! Otherwise the invalid default parameters of the
RDC will overwrite the parameters of the TCU which have been preset ex works.
Only the following parameters have to be set in the transceiver configuration menu:
- Antenna Position
- Frequency Deviation (if necessary)
- Blanking Sector (if requested)
- Speed Capability single/double
- Antenna Motor Frequency
- Configure the system’s interfaces for the ship’s sensors. Depending on the interface type,
use the menu item Serial Interfaces of the relevant Indicator, and/or Sensor Interfaces.
For further information, see Section 5.11.8 on page 127.
- Configure all ship-specific data, especially the system position in the menu System/Ship
Parameters > Ship Data.
6. Transceiver Adjustments
Use the Service menu to perform the transceiver adjustments. See Section 5.12.2 from page 145
on for further information. All adjustments of the Setting-to-Work menu have to be performed.
Every adjustment must be stored by means of the Save button. The parameters are stored in the
IDE memory module and in the TCU. Before the performance monitor adjustments can be
performed, the RDC pcb must be adjusted.
7. Indicator Adjustments (RDC)
- RDC adjustments (ADC threshold adjustments) as described in Section 5.12.1.2 on page
140. The adjustment must be performed at every single Indicator for all Transceivers.
8. Backup
The parameter settings must be stored on diskettes in duplicate. One copy should stay on the ship
(it can be stored in the technical manual) and one copy must be sent to the manufacturer.
Use the Commissioning Data menu (Config Transfer) to generate the backup. For further infor-
mation, see Section 5.13 from page 151 onwards.
9. Dual or Multiple Installations
All Indicators and Transceivers must be configured at one Indicator. It is possible to load and store the
parameters directly from one Indicator to another via CAN-Bus (without use of a backup diskette). This
can be performed by means of the function Commissioning Data > Config Transfer of the System
Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.13 on page 151 for further information.
158 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components
NOTE:
To avoid the mistakes which may be caused by originating different parameter settings from different
Display Electronics Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Elec-
tronics Unit.
All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function afterwards to the other radars.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 159

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT Technical Manual
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

This example contains the most important parameters for a typical dual installation.
6.2.1 System Diagram
SAM SAM
GEARBOX with GEARBOX with

TRANSCEIVER 1 TRANSCEIVER 2
(S-Band) (X-Band, 8 ft)
CHARTPILOT
WP 1
WP 2
WP 3
LAN
Indicator 1 Indicator 2
Display Display
Electronics Unit Electronics Unit
Radar Scan Converter Radar Scan Converter

AIS
ARPA Electronics Electronics Unit ARPA Electronics
Ethernet Module Ethernet Ethernet Module

Sensor Input
Radar Data Converter S1 Radar Data Converter
S2
TVA1 out
Box TVA1 out Box
LAN
Ethernet Interconnection Ethernet Interconnection
CAN 0, Radar bus
CAN Bus CAN Bus
Interconnection CAN 1, Nav bus Interconnection
1 1
Serial Interface 2 2 Serial Interface
Interconnection 3 3 Interconnection
4 4
Ship's Sensors - Indicator 1 Ship's Sensors - Indicator 2

ztr1_190.eps
Gyro Output 1 Gyro Output 2

Position 1 Position 2
Log Echograph 4630
Wind
Fig. 6-1 System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example)
160 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT
6.2.2 System Layout Menu

Configure System Layout
Indicator Indicator 1 RADARPILOT 1100

Indicator 2 RADARPILOT 1100
Indicator 3 Not Connected
Transceiver Transceiver 1 Connected

Transceiver 2 Connected
Transceiver 3 Not Connected
Interswitch Not Connected
Sensor Interfaces Sensor Interface 1 Not Connected

Sensor Interface 2 Not Connected
NACOS Configuration TRACKPILOT Not Connected

ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDP.) Not Connected
Planning System Connected Planning System 1
AIS Connected to LAN
VDR Not connected
Fig. 6-2 System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 161

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.3 Configure (System / Ship Parameters)

Configure System / Ship Parameters
Ship Data
Administration
Vessel MS Test
Shipping Company Mustermann
Flag German
Call Sign DACF
Phone 0087X1120079
Fax 0087X1120080
MMSI Number 1) XXX XXX XXX
IMO Number XXXX XXX
Type of Ship Passenger Vessel
Type of Ship coded as No. 69 On/Off Off
System Position and other Ship Dimensions 2) Gyro against Magnetic
Compass
Distance to Bow 10
Gyro against COG of Main
Distance to Stern 120 Position Sensor
Distance to SB 8 Gyro against COG of Redun-
dant Position Sensor
Distance to P 8
Ignore Gyro against COG
Length at Waterline 122 above ROT of:
Nominal Speed 20.0 Ignore Gyro against COG
Acceleration 0.020 below Speed of:
Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 200°/min Full sensitivity Gyro against
COG above speed of:
Position Quality Check Off
Minimum Radius 0.4 NM On/Off Off
Maximum Radius 3.0 NM Speed against Redundant
Speed Sensor
Gyro Monitoring
Speed against SOG of Main
Speed Monitoring Position Sensor
Position Monitoring Speed against SOG of
Redundant Position Sensor
Basic Radar
Video Anti Clutter Sea on On/Off Off
ARPA Lost Target w.o. Al. 19.5 NM Position against Redundant
Position Sensor
AIS Lost Target w.o. Al. 16.0 NM
TB2 Term 15,16, HM turn Not Connected
Startup Sensor Selection Heading Heading Sensor 1

Speed Log 1 3)
Position Position Sensor 1
Time Position Sensor 1
Time from selected Position Sensor Yes
Differentiated Heading Selected Heading Sensor
Default Depth Depth Sensor 1 1)
Must be entered for AIS!
2) See Figure 6-4 on page 163.
Default Wind Wind Sensor 1 3)BSH does not allow GPS as
Default Weather Manual Weather speed sensor.
Fig. 6-3 Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation
162 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
8m 8m
-4 m 4 m
LT = Log Transducer, defines the System Position

10 m
10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS = Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position

LT
RX = Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position
- Longitudinal +
-110 m
120 m
-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
P1 = GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance

RS Longitudinal to System Position
RX P2 = GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance
P1
Longitudinal to System Position
P2
PAIS PAIS = AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m Distance
Longitudinal to System Position
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 6-4 System Position
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 163

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.4 Configure (Radar > Indicator)

Configure Radar Indicator
Indicator 1
Administration Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3068)
Keyboard RADAR Keyboard
Name Indicator 1
Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec
System Fault Alarm Disable
Dangerous Target Alarm Disable
Lost Target Alarm Disable
Guard Zone Alarm Disable
Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes
CHARTRADAR Function Not Available
CHARTRADAR Identification Code XXXXXXXXX
CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX
Conning Not Available
Based on Specification IEC 60936-1
Radar PPI Radius Use Default
Monitor Aspect Ratio Use Default
Head-Up PPI Orientation Bow-up (standard)
Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP Yes
Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled
Double End Ferry No
Fig. 6-5 Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1
164 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial Interfaces
Serial I/O 1
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
Baud Rate 38400
Serial Gyro Connected Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1
Position Not Connected Display Selected Gyro No
Speed Not Connected
Time Not Connected
Output Transfer GLL OFF
Depth Not Connected Transfer DTM OFF
Wind Not Connected Transfer VTG OFF
Weather Not Connected Transfer HDT OFF
Transfer TTM OFF
Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
Transfer RTE/WPL OFF
Serial Output used as Not defined
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 165

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 2
Baud Rate 4800
Serial Gyro Not Connected
Position Not Connected Channel Position Sensor 1
Speed Not Connected Distance Longitudinal - 85
Time Not Connected Distance Transversal -4
Output Sensor Number 1
Depth Not Connected GLL, GGA Selection Pos. from GLL Message
Wind Not Connected Use Speed from Position Sensor Yes 1)
Weather Not Connected Use Time from Position Senor Yes
Transfer GLL OFF
Transfer DTM OFF
Transfer VTG OFF
Transfer HDT OFF
Transfer TTM OFF
Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
Serial Output used as AIS Navigation Data
1)
Set to No for DNV/BSH ships
166 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Channel Log 1
Distance Longitudinal 0
Distance Transversal 0
Serial I/O 3
Log Type 1 Axis Log
Longit. Speed Filter Const. 1
Baud Rate 4800
Transversal Speed Const. 1
Position Not Connected
Speed Connected Transfer GLL OFF
Time Not Connected Transfer DTM OFF
Output Transfer VTG OFF
Depth Not Connected Transfer HDT OFF
Wind Not Connected Transfer TTM OFF
Weather Not Connected Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Serial I/O 4 Transfer MTA OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Transfer RTE/WPL OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Serial Output used as Not defined
Position Not Connected Transfer GLL OFF
Speed Not Connected Transfer DTM OFF
Time Not Connected Transfer VTG OFF
Output Transfer HDT OFF
Depth Not Connected Transfer TTM OFF
Wind Connected Transfer OSD OFF
Weather Not Connected Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 167

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Indicator 2 Administration Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA

Connected Monitor 16" (AZ 3068)
Keyboard RADAR Keyboard
Name Indicator 2
Alarm Relays Activation Delay 30 sec
System Fault Alarm Disable
Dangerous Target Alarm Disable
Lost Target Alarm Disable
Guard Zone Alarm Disable
Allowed to be Sensor Master Yes
CHARTRADAR Function Not Available
CHARTRADAR Identification Code XXXXXXXXX
Serial Interfaces CHART Function License Key XXXXXXXXX
Conning Not Available
Based on Specification IEC 60936-1
Radar PPI Radius Use Default
Monitor Aspect Ratio Use Default
Head-Up Display Orientation Bow-up (standard)
Monitor Control Interface Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP Yes
Central Dimming Adjustment User Controlled
Double End Ferry No
168 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 1
Baud Rate 38400
Serial Gyro Connected Channel of this Gyro Heading Sensor 1
Position Not Connected Display Selected Gyro No
Speed Not Connected
Time Not Connected
Output
Depth Not Connected
Wind Not Connected
Weather Not Connected
Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF
Transfer VTG OFF
Transfer HDT OFF
Transfer TTM OFF
Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 169

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Serial I/O 2
Baud Rate 4800
Position Connected Channel Position Sensor 2
Speed Not Connected Distance Longitudinal - 85
Time Not Connected Distance Transversal +4
Output Sensor Number 2
Depth Not Connected GLL, GGA Selection Pos from GLL message
Wind Not Connected Use Speed from Position Sensor Yes 1)
Weather Not Connected Use Time from Position Senor Yes
Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF
Transfer VTG OFF
Transfer HDT OFF
Transfer TTM OFF
Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Transfer VBW OFF
Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
Serial Output used as AIS Navigation Data
1)
Set to No for DNV/BSH ships
170 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF
Transfer VTG OFF
Transfer HDT OFF
Transfer TTM OFF
Transfer OSD OFF
Transfer MWV OFF
Serial I/O 3
Transfer ZDA OFF
Transfer DBT OFF
Baud Rate 4800
Transfer ROT OFF
Transfer MWD OFF
Position Not Connected
Transfer VBW OFF
Speed Not Connected
Transfer MHU OFF
Time Not Connected
Transfer MMB OFF
Output
Transfer MTA OFF
Depth Connected
Wind Not Connected
Weather Not Connected
Depth Value Below Transducer
Transfer GLL OFF

Transfer DTM OFF
Serial I/O 4 Transfer VTG OFF
Driver NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2) Transfer HDT OFF
Baud Rate 4800 Transfer TTM OFF
Serial Gyro Not Connected Transfer OSD OFF
Position Not Connected Transfer MWV OFF
Speed Not Connected Transfer ZDA OFF
Time Not Connected Transfer DBT OFF
Output Transfer ROT OFF
Depth Not Connected Transfer MWD OFF
Wind Not Connected Transfer VBW OFF
Weather Not Connected Transfer MHU OFF
Transfer MMB OFF
Transfer MTA OFF
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 171

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.5 Configure (Radar > Transceiver)

Configure Radar Transceiver
Transceiver 1 Type of Generation RADAR 1100 S-Band

Additional Information Main Mast
Frequency Deviation 0
Sector Blanking Number of Blanking Sectors None
Antenna Speed Capability Single (Low Speed)
Distance Longitudinal - 80
Height above Sea Level 28
Beam Width 1.8
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution 415
Antenna Motor Frequency 60 Hz
Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX
Transceiver 2 Type of Generation RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW

Additional Information Main Mast
Frequency Deviation 0
Sector Blanking Number of Blanking Sectors 1None
Antenna Speed Capability Single
Distance Longitudinal - 82
Height above Sea Level 25
Beam Width 1.0 (8 ft Antenna)
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution 1920
Antenna Motor Frequency 60 Hz
Last Modification Date XX.XX.XX
Fig. 6-13 Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation
172 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.6 Configure (AIS)

Configure AIS
AIS Channel AIS Sensor 1
Distance of GPS Antenna Longi- -110 m
tudinal (see Figure 6-4)
Distance of GPS Antenna Trans- -2 m
versal (see Figure 6-4)
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud
Interface S1
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud
Interface S2
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Not connected
Interface S3
Fig. 6-14 AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation
6.2.7 Configure (Planning System)
Configure Planning System

Select Radar Indicator for Indicator 1
CHARTPILOT ARPA Targets
Sensor Information via Ethernet True
to CHARTPILOT
Fig. 6-15 Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 173

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3 Important Hardware Components Technical Manual
6.3 Important Hardware Components

6.3.1 COM Expander GE3044G210
TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22

Manufacturer’s use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers,
TB1...5 Function do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.
Sensor interface, TB7 Function
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218 1 Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
TP23 Termination
1 RxD + 2 Alarm out 1 centre Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
2 RxD - 3 Alarm out 1 break (normally closed) No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
3 TxD + 4 Alarm out 2 make (not used)
4 TxD - 5 Alarm out 2 centre (not used) TB8 Mains supply
5 GND 6 Alarm out 2 break (not used) 1 PE
For all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1. The relays are switched on if the pcb is working! 2 N
3 L1
TP12 TP13
1 TP11 1 1
2 1 1
1 TB8 2
1 3
Plug-in pcb 4
2 2 TB7 3
4
TB3 3 TB4 3 5
4 4 6 F1
5 5 TP21 1
1 1 1 1
2 2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2 Plug-in pcb 3 TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
TB2 3 TB5 3
4 4
5 5
1
2 1
TB1 3 2
TB6
4 3
5 4
ztr1_624.jpg
ON 8 S1
1 1 1
DS1 DS2 DS3 8 1
TB6 Function
1 Digital input 1 (+)
3 Digital input 2 (+) S1 ON
DS4 DS5 DS6 S1 Function
1 OFF = COM Expander 1
TP41 Function ON = COM Expander 2
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current 2 Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)
loop (optocoupler driver input) 3...7 No function (default = OFF)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) 8 Manufacturer‘s use, must be OFF (default)
TP42 Function J7 Function

Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current 1 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
loop (optocoupler driver input) 2 CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) 3 CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
DS1...6 Function 5/6 5 connected to 6
DS1 green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used 7/8 7 connected to 8
DS6 red flashing at
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 6-16 COM Expander pcb
174 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.3 Important Hardware Components
6.3.2 Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219

DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indi- Switch No. DIP Function

cator Number Switch
On=closed=0; off=open=1 4 3 2 1 S1/5...8 ON OFF
Sets Indicator No. to 1 On On On On Boot from IDE Boot from diskette drive
5 memory module (the software update
Sets Indicator No. to 2 On On On Off routine is started while
(default)
booting).
Sets Indicator No. to 3 On On Off On
Monitor resolution Monitor resolution
Sets Indicator No. to 4 On On Off Off 6 1024x768 1280x1024
Sets Indicator No. to 5 On Off On On Monitor frequency
7 Monitor frequency 60 Hz
All other settings are not admissible 72 Hz
8 Normal operation Service mode on 1)

(default)
1)
See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.
CAN Bus Termination Settings for the different Monitor Types

TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1 Monitor S1/6 S1/7 Monitor S1/6 S1/7
Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus termi-
TP161 1/2 nated AZ3069G040 Off Off AZ3066G040 On Off
No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not
TP162 1/2 terminated AZ3063G04x/5x Off Off AZ3056G04x Off Off
See also Section 4.3 on page 42. AZ3068G04x/5x Off Off
AZ3065G040 Off Off
Speaker TP161
E15 E20 E2 TP151 TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6 S1 DS8 DS10 DS2 E18 DS12 E17
DS5 DS7 E10/ DS9 DS1 DS3 DS11 DS13
1 1 E11 1
1 1 1 1 1 8 1 E1 1
E4
1 1 E28 1 E12 1
E14
1 1
1 E25
1 E16
J2 1 1
1 E26
1
1 E27
1
ztr1_623.jpg
Termination of Motherboard
J4 E19 TP103 Serial interface 4 E5 E3, ext. reset contact
ztr1_011.jpg
TP102 Serial interface 3

E5/2
E5/1
E20/1
Fig. 6-17 RDC pcb
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 175

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.3.3 Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207

For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.
TB Function TB Function TP78 Termination

10 AIS RxD, Input - 40 Alarm out 1, make Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).
11 AIS RxD, Input + 41 Alarm out 1, centre No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
12 Do not connect! 42 Alarm out 1, break
13 Do not connect! 43 Alarm out 2, make
14 AIS TxD, Output - 44 Alarm out 2, centre TP99 Addresses
15 AIS TxD Output + 45 Alarm out 2, break Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)
16 AIS GND Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also a
(≥Rev 03 only) TB Function second Analog Interface is installed)
J1 RS422 Interface 32 ST2 status input for log
Connector for SH3014G203, 33 ST2 status input for log
RS422 interface (≥Rev 03 only)
TP5 TP1 TP74 TP75 TP90 TP70
TB52, PE
1 1 TB51, N F1
TB10 TB40 TB1 1 TB50, L1
TB11 TB41 TB2
TB12 1 1
TB42 TB3
TB13 TB43 TB4
TB14 TB44 TB5
TB15 TB45 TB6
1 1
TB16 TB7
TB30 TB8 1
TB31
TB25 TB32
TB24 TB33
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20 1
ztr1_080.jpg
1 7
TB Function TB Function J7 TP2

25 Common (stepper) 1 Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts) DS34 DS35 DS7
24 Gyro REF 2 / reference common 2 Log BT (Bottom Track)
(synchro) 3 Log WT (Water Track) DS36 DS33 DS37
23 Gyro REF 1 (synchro) 4 Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
22 Gyro T 5 Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
21 Gyro S 6 Log VX (speed)
20 Gyro R 7 Log VY (speed transversal (drift)) break = normally closed (n.c.)
8 Log GND make = normally opened (n.o.)
Fig. 6-18 Analog Interface ≥Rev. 03
176 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 6.3 Important Hardware Components
Connection of Log and Gyro

LOG
1-axis log connection to Radar
Analog Interface 2-Axis Log connection to Radar Analog Interface
TB TB
8 GND (common) 8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed) 6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (Water Track)
2 BT (Bottom Track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
1.) DC Stepper System Analog Interface 2.) DC stepper system Analog Interface
( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - ground ) DS 33, 34, 35
+ TB are flashing green - TB are flashing red
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
25 common 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative”
3.) DC stepper system Analog Interface 4.) DC Stepper System Analog Interface
( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35 ( common - high ) DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red TB are flashing green
20 R 20 R
21 S 21 S
22 T 22 T
+ 25 common - 25 common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Negative” Parameter Analog Gyro System = “DC Stepper Positive”
In DC stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semi- AC System 50 Hz Analog Interface
conductors. See the following example: AC System 60 Hz TB
23 REF 1
DC stepper system Analog Interface 20 R
( common - high ) 21 S
TB 22 T
20 R 24 REF 2 (reference
21 S common)
22 T
25 common
ztr1_124.eps
+(-) Gyro (Synchro)
Gyro
Fig. 6-19 Connection of log and gyro
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 177

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
TB2 Function TB 2, Alarm Contacts TB3 Function SB = Solder Bridge break = normally closed (n.c.)
19 = TB3/5 The alarm contacts are provided by 15 24V ON/OFF ONN These solder bridges must be opened make = normally opened (n.o.)
18 = TB3/5 the RDC. See the RDC description for 14 24V ON/OFF ONP when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
17 = TB3/5 technical data and configuration. 13 24V ON/OFF ONN For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
Double End Ferry: 12 24V ON/OFF ONP If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
15, 16 closed = AFT TB18 Function 11 CAN0_A (IN) power supply cable GE3050G020 must
15, 16 opened = FWD For Remote Keyboard Electronics 10 CAN0_B (IN) be used (J9). See also TP11. TB5 Function
Audio Alarm Ack.: 6 CAN_KBC GND 9 CAN1_A (IN) 1 L1 spare
14 Alarm Ack. M 5 CAN_KBC GND 8 CAN1_B (IN) TB18, J100, J8, TP10 2 N spare
13 Alarm Ack. P 4 CAN_KBC B Out -> 7 CAN0_A (OUT) These connectors and testpins are 3 PE spare
Chart Alarm: 3 CAN_KBC A Out -> 6 CAN0_B (OUT) needed for the connection of a Remote
12 AL_out4 make 2 CAN_KBC B in <- 5 CAN_GND Keyboard Electronics. See the corre- TB6 Function
11 AL_out4 centre 1 CAN_KBC A in <- 4 CAN1_A (OUT) sponding technical manual for further 1 L1 to interf. expander
10 AL_out4 break 3 CAN1_B (OUT) information. 2 N to interf. expander
Target Alarm: 2 24V ON/OFF ONN 3 PE to interf. expander
(ARPA/AIS Alarm) 1 24V ON/OFF ONP Position of the RKE pcb,
9 AL_out3 make IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus mounting by means of 4 bolts. TB4 Function
8 AL_out3 centre are identical. Ship’s mains
7 AL_out3 break 1 L1 in
Dead Man Alarm Trig: J5 2 N in
TP10 1 3 PE in
6 AL_out2 make 1
5 AL_out2 centre 1 J7 Function
4 AL_out2 break 1
1 Mains to Analog Interface
Radar Alarm: SB J8 SB SB 1 L1
3 AL_out1 make F2 1
2 AL_out1 centre 1 2 N
1 AL_out1 break 1 3 PE
F1 TB10 Function
J5 CAUTION Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 1
If the Analog Interface 1 L1 out, to monitor
is not connected, the pcb 4 pcb 3 pcb 2 F3 2 N out, to monitor
following jumpers must DS1 1 3 PE out, to monitor
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN bus: TB11 Function
- J5 1/2 J91 Plug-in pcb 1 DS2 1 L1 out, displ. el.
- J5 3/4 1 2 N out, displ. el.
K1
SB
- J5 5/6 3 PE out, displ. el.

- J5 7/8 F5 TB13 Function
TB1 Function 1 1 1 F4 1 L1 in, switched
Ship’s sensors RS422 TB1 TB2 TB3 Drillings for the by monitor
20 GND4 LAN-BNC adapter T1 230 V 2 N in, monitor
19 TXD4- 3 PE in, monitor
18 TXD4+ 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 J9 115 V
17 RXD4- TP11 1 J100 S1
16 RXD4+ 1 LED Function
1 DS1 is lit when mains is
15 GND3
14 TXD3- switched on at the monitor of
Drillings for the RGB Buffer this radar.
13 TXD3+
12 RXD3- DS2 is lit when the DC
11 RXD3+ voltage is available from the
10 GND2 transformer/rectifier.
9 TXD2- J6
8 TXD2+
Drillings for the Video Fuses
Selector SH3023G205 F1 System’s mains
7 RXD2-
6 RXD2+ fuse
5 GND1 F2 System’s
4 TXD1- J4 J3 J2 J1 mains fuse
F3 Mains fuse monitor
ztr1_613.jpg
3 TXD1+
2 RXD1- F4 Mains T1
1 RXD1+ F5 24V ON/OFF signal
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232, See also page 190.
RS485, see Section
4.5.9.3 on page 66.
J4 Function J3 Function J1 Function
TB17 Function to El. Unit (RDC) to El. Unit serial port to El. Unit (RDC) 22 AL_out2 centre 44 VGND1
1/2 TVA1 out 1 TVA1 1 n.c. 1 RXD1+ 23 AL_out2 make 45 V12M
2 TVA2 2 COM1_RXD 2 RXD1- 24 AL_out3 break 46 n.c.
3/4 Screen 3 3 COM1_TXD 3 TXD1+ 25 AL_out3 centre 47 Audio Alarm
4 4 COM1_DTR 4 TXD1- 26 AL_out3 make Ack. P
TB16 Function 5 5 COM1_GND 5 GND1 27 AL_out4 break 48 Audio Alarm
1/2 TVA2 in 6 GND 6 COM1_DSR 6 RXD2+ 28 AL_out4 centre Ack. N
7 GND 7 COM1_RTS 7 RXD2- 29 AL_out4 make 49 Alarm-ACK2 P
3/4 Screen 30 +5 V
8 GND 8 COM1_CTS 8 TXD2+
31 TXD4+ TP11
TB15 Function 9 9 n.c. 9 TXD2- Jumper on 1/2 = default
10 10 GND2 32 TXD4-
1/2 TVA1 in J2 Function 33 GND4 Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
11 11 RXD3+ if the power supply cable
12 Serial interface to monitor 12 RXD3- 34 GND
3/4 Screen 35 LKAP (Beeper +) GE3050G020 is connected
13 1 LKAP (beeper +) 13 TXD3+ (plug-in pcbs)
14 2 RXD 14 TXD3- 36 LKAM (Beeper -)
J9, J91 Function 15 GND 3 TXD 15 GND3 37 CAN0_A
Supply input for plug-in 4 DTR 16 RXD4+ 38 CAN0_B
pcbs 5 GND 17 RXD4- 39 CAN1_A
1 Vcc J6 6 DSR 18 AL_out1 break 40 CAN1_B
2 GND Connector for the 7 RTS 19 AL_out1 centre 41 CAN_GND
3 Vcc RGB Buffer. See 8 CTS 20 AL_out1 make 42 VGND2
4 PE Section 4.5.13. 9 LKAM (beeper -) 21 AL_out2 break 43 V12R
Fig. 6-20 Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
178 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 7 Revision Overview
Technical Manual
7 Revision Overview
7 Revision Overview
This table shows the differences in the functionality and the necessary prerequisites for the use of the
different revisions of hardware or software components. For a description in detail, see the corresponding
sections in this technical manual. The following table is only an overview. If an item has to be exchanged,
the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Component Extended / different

(hardware / soft- functionalities Prerequisites Remarks
ware)
So far, no revi-
sions/versions of
hard-/software
exist.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 179

t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05
7 Revision Overview RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
7 Revision Overview
180 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 8 Repair/Maintenance
Technical Manual 8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes
8 Repair/Maintenance
GENERAL:
The jumper settings and switch settings on a replacement pcb must be

the same as on the defective pcb. The wire connections must be made
in exactly the same way. Exceptions are explained in this manual.
8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes
For the BIOS configuration, it is necessary to use a PC keyboard with PS/2 connector. For the handling
of the System Maintenance Manager, it is also more convenient to work with an additional keyboard. It
may be helpful to connect a buzzer to the motherboard of the Display Electronics Unit to recognize the
signals described in Section 8.2.4.
8.2 Trouble-Shooting
8.2.1 Hints
In case of the of problems during setting-to-work, the cabling should be checked again. All components
must be supplied with power.
- Read the system fault messages on the screen to get more information about the problem.
- Try to perform the self-check routines as described in Section 5.9 on page 105 to localize the fault.
- If no radar video is displayed, the LEDs DS11...13 of the RDC pcb indicate, whether the incoming
signal is correct.
8.2.2 System Faults
The system fault codes are displayed on the monitor together with a short description. To obtain more
information about the system faults and to display the existing faults, use the System Maintenance
Manager with the submenu Telemonitoring Data. For the description of Telemonitoring Data, see
Section 5.10 on page 109.
The system faults of the Telemonitoring Data screen are displayed in four columns. These columns are:
- Error
- Dev.
- SubDev.
- Info
The column "Error" shows the system fault number. The column "Dev." shows the device which is
causing the fault, and the column "SubDev." gives an indication for the defective subdevice, if possible.
The column "Info" gives more detailed information about the fault. The system faults are also listed in
Section 10 on page 207 in this manual. This information cannot cover all defects. It will be updated as
often as possible.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 181

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8 Repair/Maintenance RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
8.2 Trouble-Shooting Technical Manual
8.2.3 Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog)
The RDC has a watchdog function. If an error is detected in the electronics units’ components, a red
screen is generated. By means of the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the mother-
board is reset (for the connection, see Section 4.5.4 on page 53). In case of such a reset, the system
reboots. If the reset cable is not connected or the connection is faulty, the red screen is displayed perma-
nently, because the reset cannot be performed.
In case of a permanent red screen, check the reset cabling and perform the RDC watchdog test.
If the system displays the red screen and reboots occasionally or repeatedly, there is a hardware or soft-
ware problem.
8.2.4 Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start
If the Display Electronics Unit does not start, check the items of the following table.
Symptom/Problem Remedy
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if This happens if the BIOS settings have been lost. In this case, the
the ATX Power On contacts are shortened BIOS Setup has to be performed as described in Section 5.14.4.
(see Section 5.14). See the next line if this remedy has no success.
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if The BIOS settings have not been saved after powering off and on.
the ATX Power On contacts are shortened In this case, the backup battery on the motherboard may be
(see Section 5.14) although the BIOS discharged or the motherboard is defective.
setup has been performed beforehand.
The ATX power supply fan does not work. - 230 V mains supply is missing.
- The internal fuse of the power supply (Display Electronics Unit) is
blown.
- The power supply is defective.
- One of the power outlets of the power supply is short-circuited.
- One of the devices connected to the power supply is defective.
The CPU’s heatsink fan does not work. - The CPU’s heatsink fan is defective.
- The motherboard is defective.
- One of the pcb’s connected to the motherboard is defective or
connected incorrectly.
- The power supply is defective.
- The CPU is defective.
The buzzer sounds continuously with long - The memory module is defective or connected incorrectly to the
beeps. motherboard
The buzzer sounds a sequence of one - The Graphics And Video Processor is defective or connected
long and three short beeps (repeatedly). incorrectly to the motherboard.
The buzzer sounds one short beep, but - The connection between monitor and graphics and video
the monitor remains black or displays "NO processor is incorrect.
SYNC" - The Graphics And Video Processor is defective.
The Electronics Unit does not start. The power supply unit is equipped with a protective circuit against
tottering contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within
0.5 s, the power supply does not start and it must be switched off for
5...10 s until it can be switched on again.
General Guidelines for Troubleshooting with the Display Electronics Unit

Before removing or inserting any component, switch off the power!
1. Check all power supply connectors.
2. Check if the pcbs are connected correctly in their sockets. If there is any doubt, remove and insert
the pcb again.
182 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.2 Trouble-Shooting
3. Insert the memory module in another socket.

4. If one or more pcb’s seem to be installed in a skew way (i.e. not vertically, or distorted) then:
- Remove the pcbs.
- Untighten the motherboard’s screws (so that the motherboard can be shifted).
- Re-insert the pcbs and fix them by means of their screws.
- Tighten the screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the pcbs.
5. Clean the pcbs’ and memory modules’ contacts, first using at first a plastic rubber and then a cotton
cloth with some alcohol.
6. Remove all pcbs from the motherboard and connect a speaker to the motherboard’s speaker
connector (labelled "SPKR" or "SPEAKER").
6.1 When powering on the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds continuously with long
beeps, because the memory module is missing. If this does not happen, the motherboard must
be exchanged.
6.2 Insert the memory module in one of the memory sockets.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker repeatedly sounds a sequence of
one long and three short beeps, because the Graphics And Video Processor is missing. If this
does not happen, the memory modules must be exchanged.
6.3 Insert the Graphics And Video Processor into the appropriate socket and connect the monitor
directly.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep and the
BIOS copyright message appears on the screen. If this does not happen, the Graphics And
Video Processor must be exchanged.
6.4 Insert the RDC into the appropriate socket.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep, the BIOS
copyright message appears on the screen and the radar software is started. If this does not
happen, the RDC must be exchanged.
6.5 Insert the remaining pcbs step by step and verify the function of the Display Electronics Unit.
If any malfunctions are detected, the pcb inserted last must be exchanged.
8.2.5 Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only)
If the service switch S1/8 of the RDC is switched on (see Section 4.5.4.2 on page 57), the sequential
start of the processes is displayed during booting. When an error is detected, the booting is stopped and
the process which causes the problem can be recognized. This function may be helpful to localize a
problem in cooperation with the service department of the manufacturer.
8.2.6 The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System
If the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT is defective or the file system is faulty, the MULTIPILOT shuts down
and reboots via the IDE memory module or it reboots via the IDE memory module after it has been
powered down manually. This is caused by a modification of the boot sequence which is set automatically
during the booting.
The IDE memory module contains the complete operating system and application software of a RADAR-
PILOT 1100. In this state, the complete radar functions are available.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 183

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.2 Trouble-Shooting Technical Manual
If the automatic detection of the defective hard disk drive fails, the MULTIPILOT can be configured to start
as a RADARPILOT by means of the MP1100 Setup CD-ROM. After the repair works has been
completed, the system must be configured to boot as a MULTIPILOT. See the following descriptions.
8.2.6.1 Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100):
Proceed as follows:
1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM
2. Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display
Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off by means of the power
switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).
3. The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?
appears, click the NO button.
4. Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System
(HDD) appears. Click the YES button.
5. Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.
6. When prompted, remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.
The MULTIPILOT will now boot from the IDE memory module as a RADARPILOT 1100 until the standard
MULTIPILOT function is enabled again as described in Section 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.2 Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100):
1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM

2. Enter the Maintenance Menus and start a software update.
3. The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?
appears, click the NO button.
4. Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System
(HDD) appears. Click the NO button.
5. Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.
6. Remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.
The MULTIPILOT 1100 will now boot from the hard disk drive as a MULTIPILOT 1100.
8.2.7 Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty
The following information is valid for the TFT monitors AZ3056G042, AZ3063G041, AZ3064G040,
AZ3065G040, AZ3066G040, AZ3068G040.
If the colors, the brightness and/or the contrast of a monitor are not correct or if there are differences
between the monitors in one system, the reason might be that the user default settings which have been
set by the manufacturer have been modified.
Especially for ECDIS purposes, the monitors must be adjusted to the values which have been determined
during the licensing. The values have been stored in a non-volatile memory of the monitor. In case of
uncertainty, these values can be re-loaded by the technician in the following way:
1. Open the OSD menu of the monitor (Menu key)
2. Load (Factory) Default must be selected
3. + must be pressed to open the submenus.
184 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.2 Trouble-Shooting
4. Load User Default must be selected.

Load Factory Default must NOT be selected. If this has happened, the user defaults must be loaded
again.
When the user defaults have been loaded, the following values must have been set:
- Brightness = 50
- Contrast = 70
- Fill to aspect ratio must have been set and NOT Fill Screen
Interferences as well as muddy vertical lines or slight indications of these effects are not permissible.
The fine tuning can be performed by means of the Frequency and Phase sliders. The adjustment should
start with the sliders in centre (50%) position.
8.2.8 Trackball Operation is Erratic
If the Trackball does not work properly, it is advisable to clean it. Usually, the Trackball has become dirty
through crumbs or through spilt drinks.
To clean the Trackball, it must be removed from the Operating Unit. On the upper side of the Trackball
there are three screws which must be removed to open it.
The Trackball and the roll wheels can be cleaned by means of a soft cloth and alcohol.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 185

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.3 Software Update and Installation Technical Manual
8.3 Software Update and Installation
8.3.1 System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100
To update the software, follow the instructions in Section 5.12.1 on page 140 on.
Please pay also attention to the following sections.
8.3.2 System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100
The operating system and the application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In
addition to that, the operating system and the software of a standard radar system are stored in an IDE
memory module. Both systems are installed on the MULTIPILOT 1100 ex works. They can be installed
and updated simultaneously by means of the MP 1100 Setup CD. Usually, the MULTIPILOT runs with
the software of the hard-disk. In case of a problem with the hard-disk drive, it is still possible to use the
MULTIPILOT as a radar, which runs with the software of the RDC. See Section 8.2.6 for further informa-
tion.
For first installation of the software only (formatted or new hard-disk):

1. Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 to the OFF position to force the booting from the DVD-ROM drive or
the hard-disk. Set the boot sequence in the BIOS setup (Advanced BIOS Features) to SCSI,
CDROM, HHD-0 as described in Section 5.14 from page 153 on.
2. Verify also the BIOS settings referring to Section 5.14 from page 153 on.
3. Verify that the IRQ of the RDC (first device displayed in the list) is not shared with the LAN network
adapter. Refer to the table of PCI devices which is displayed during the booting. If the IRQ numbers
are shared, the BIOS settings must be checked.
4. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on
again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,
it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
housing).
5. Follow the setup procedure:
- Begin with installation procedure? Select YES
- MP1100 application update? Select NO
- Update operating system? Select NO
- Create all new (all chart data will be lost)? Select YES
- All chart data will be lost! Abort? Select NO
The hard-disk will be formatted, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT 1100 application soft-
ware will be copied to the hard-disk and the RDC, the TCUs and the interface extensions will be
programmed.
6. Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again to boot from the CD-ROM (if it is not possible
to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off by
means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).
7. Perform the manual modification of the boot procedure as described in Section 8.2.6.2 on page 184.
8. Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 back to ON position.
186 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.3 Software Update and Installation
For regular software installation (older version of the MULTIPILOT software still installed):
This software installation is an update of an existing software version.
1. Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on
again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,
it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
housing).
2. Follow the instructions of the setup procedure.
If the systems does not allow a regular software installation:

The operating system and the radar software are combined in one and the same program. This program
is stored in the IDE memory module. Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to install the soft-
ware. Only if the System Maintenance Manager cannot be started to update the software might it
be helpful to reinstall the complete software to find out whether the hardware is damaged or whether the
software installation was faulty.
It is definitely advisable to rule out any other reason for a defect before the system software is
installed again.
1. To install the software, switch off the radar and open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit.
2. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC in accordance with the description in Section 4.5.4 on page 53.
By means of this switch, the radar is forced to boot directly from the diskette drive.
3. Put the "Flash Update Facility Boot Disk" into the diskette drive.
4. Start the radar.
5. Follow the instructions.
6. Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC back to the normal position and restart the radar.
7. Restore the parameters from another Display Electronics Unit of the system or from the backup
diskette. If no backup diskette or no other Display Electronics Unit is available, the parameters
(system configuration) must be entered manually by means of the System Maintenance Manager.
The parameters of the transceiver are stored in the TCU. They can be loaded from there. Check
whether these transceiver parameters make sense.
8. Test that the radar is functioning correctly.
If the system parameters cannot be stored, even although the system software has recently been
installed, the RDC must be exchanged.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 187

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.4 Opening the Housings Technical Manual
8.4 Opening the Housings
8.4.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing
The cover of the Display Electronics Unit is fixed with 4 screws. Remove the screws to open the housing.
8.4.2 Interconnection Box
Depending on the version, the Interconnection Box is mounted under the Display Electronics Unit (see
Figure 2-3 on page 22) or as a single bulkhead housing. To open the bulkhead version, remove the
screws in the cover. To gain access to the Interconnection Box when it is mounted under the Display
Electronics Unit, the Display Electronics Unit must be removed. To do this, unscrew (but do not remove)
the 4 screws in the flange of the Display Electronics Unit, lift it about 10 mm and remove it. The cables
do not have to be disconnected.
8.4.3 Console Housing
For service purposes, the console housings can

be opened at the base region.
To remove the cover in the base region, two locks
(1) must be released. A special key is necessary
for the locks.
The cover can be carefully pulled at the relief at
its upper side (1). Then it must be lifted out of its
mounting hole in the base (2).
1
2
ztr1_087.jpg
Locks
ztr1_009.gif
Fig. 8-1 Opening the console
8.4.4 SCC C4 Console
The procedure at the SCC C4 console is similar to the procedure at the console housing described
above.
188 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.4 Opening the Housings
8.4.5 Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit
8.4.6 Operating Unit
The Operating Unit is mounted in the

same way at the console or desktop
versions (not valid for SCC C4
console).
To gain access to the Operating Unit’s
interior, 4 screws below the Operating
Unit must be removed to unmount the
complete Operating Unit. The cable
length is sufficient to turn the Operating
Unit without disconnection.
ztr1_123.jpg
The lower shell of the Operating Unit is

fixed by means of two screws which
must be removed to unmount the shell.
If the shell has been removed, the
Keyboard Controller can be removed
or configured. If the keyboards shall be
removed, the metal frame must be
unmounted.
ztr1_023.jpg
Fig. 8-2 Opening the Operating Unit
8.4.7 Monitor
Removing the Monitor

To gain access to the monitor, the front frame must be unmounted. It is fixed by means of four hexagon
socket screws, two on top of the monitor, two under the monitor.
ztr1_029.jpg
Screws
ztr1_030.jpg
Fig. 8-3 Unmounting the front frame
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 189

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.5 Fuses Technical Manual
The screws at the underside must be untightened only. It is not necessary to remove them. When the
screws on top of the monitor have been removed, the frame can carefully be pulled from the housing.
The operating panel of the monitor is fixed at the frame by means of four nuts. It is possible to disconnect
the cable at the panel.
The monitor is fixed by means of screws
around the screen which are visible when
the front frame has been removed. The
number of screws depends of the type
(size) of monitor. To unmount the monitor,
all screws must be removed. Then the
......
monitor can be pulled carefully out of the
housing.
......
ztr1_031.jpg
Fig. 8-4 Unmounting the monitor
Checking the Cable Connections

The monitor and the Operating Unit are mounted onto the base part of the housing. Behind the monitor,
the base part of the housing has a hood. The hood is fixed by means of screws on the left and on the
right.
8.5 Fuses
See Section 8.8 on page 197 for the order numbers of the spare parts.
Interconnection Box (GE3044G216)

No. Rating
F1 6.3 A slow blow
F2 6.3 A slow blow
F3 4 A slow blow
F4 0.1 A slow blow
F5 1 A slow blow
Analog Interface (GE3044G207)

No. Rating
F1 0.5 A slow blow
190 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing
COM Expander (GE3044G210)

No. Rating
F1 2.0 A slow blow
8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing
8.6.1 Exchange of the Main Processor
The main processor is a standard PC Processor. It is plugged in a socket and can be removed without
any tools after the fan has been removed. Different types of processors are in use, due to technical
progress. For the exchange of the fan, see Section 8.6.14.2 on page 196.
NOTE:
At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fan
and the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.
8.6.2 Exchange of the Motherboard
The procedure for exchanging the motherboard depends on the version. Switch off the radar, open the
housing of the Display Electronics Unit and disconnect all cables on the motherboard and on the pcbs in
the slots. Remove the slot screws of all pcb’s and disconnect them (note the position - they must be
connected in the same slots of the new motherboard again or, if the replacement motherboard is of a
different type, in the slots which are described in Section 4.5.3.2 on page 50). Remove the screws with
which the motherboard is fixed in the housing. Replace the motherboard and wind in the screws without
tightening them. Insert the extension pcb’s into their slots and fasten the slot screws. Now tighten the
screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the installed extension pcb’s.
For the exchange of the main processor, see Section 8.6.1. For the exchange of the fan, see Section
8.6.14.2 on page 196.
If the motherboard has been exchanged, the correct BIOS settings must be set in accordance with
Section 5.14 on page 153 (if the motherboard is equipped with a soft power switch, this must be disabled
by the BIOS settings before the system can be started).
NOTE:
Some of the motherboards are equipped with an on-board sound option. In this case, the covers must be
removed from the openings for the sound connectors in the electronics unit’s housing.
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set ex works.
NOTE:
and, depending on the spare part kit, the memory modules.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 191

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing Technical Manual
8.6.3 Exchange of the Memory Modules
The memory modules are standard PC modules (DIMM). The radars needs at least 256 MB memory. The
number of modules needed depends on the module capacity. To avoid incompatibilities, it is strongly
recommended that only spare parts from SAM Electronics are used.
8.6.4 Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery
The lifetime of the battery depends on the use of the Display Electronics Unit. The shelf life of the battery
itself is about 10 years. If the battery is mounted in a radar which is permanently or often in operation,
the life will be about 5...7 years. In radars that are used rarely, the life may be even shorter.
When the CMOS backup battery is changed, the BIOS settings are lost and the settings must be re-
entered by means of an additional ASCII keyboard.
To exchange the battery, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and
remove the pcbs which are positioned above the backup battery (each pcb is fixed by means of a screw).
The battery is fixed by means of a clamp. The clamp can be bent to exchange the battery. Insert the new
battery with inscription facing up.
Plug in and fix the pcbs in the same slots as before, close the housing and continue with the setting of
the BIOS parameters.
The BIOS settings must be performed as described from Section 5.14 on page 153 on.
8.6.5 Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213)
To change the GVP, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and remove
the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Replace the GVP and fix the new one with the screw.
Further hardware or software settings are not necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs is varies, so that the
pressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and an
installation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.
8.6.6 Exchange of Ethernet Module
To change the Ethernet network module, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics
Unit and remove the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Disconnect the T-connector, replace
the network module and fix the new one with the screw. Further hardware or software settings are not
necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
If the Ethernet module is part of a CHARTRADAR 1100 and has been exchanged, the licensing
must be renewed, because the CHARTRADAR Identification Code has changed.
Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs varies, so that the
pressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and an
installation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.
192 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.6.7 Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC)
The RDC contains the adjustment values for the video signals. The values cannot be saved and the
adjustments must be repeated after the exchange.
To exchange the RDC, open the Display Electronics Unit.
1. Disconnect all cables from the pcb.
2. Unscrew the fastening screw of the RDC and pull the RDC carefully out of its slot.
3. Set the jumpers and DIP switches of the new RDC to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4. Push the new RDC into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the cables.
5. Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >
Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be
compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb software
update must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further information
about the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via
the Internet).
6. Test whether the radar is functioning correctly.
7. Adjust the video signal amplitudes and offsets as described in Section 5.12.1 on page 140.
8.6.8 Exchange of the IDE Memory Module
The IDE memory module contains all parameters and the system software (operating system and radar
application software) of the system. In a MULTIPILOT, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT appli-
cation software are stored on the hard-disk. The same set of parameters is also stored on the hard-disk
of the MULTIPILOT. Some parameters (transceiver parameters) are also stored in the TCU, and a
backup diskette with all parameters should exist. If it is not certain that the parameters stored on the
diskettes are current, it is advisable to make a backup (if possible). The parameters can be transferred
from one Display Electronics Unit to all other Display Electronics Units (Config Transfer function). If it is
certain that another Display Electronics Unit of the system has the same (and complete) set of parame-
ters for all units, they can be transferred to the Display Electronics Unit whose IDE memory module has
been exchanged.
To exchange the module, open the Display Electronics Unit.
1. Disconnect the module’s power supply cable.
2. Replace the module and connect the new one to the power supply. The power supply cable may be
different if another type of module is used, so that it must be exchanged, too.
3. The new module contains a default set of system parameters, an operating system and a radar
application software. Check whether the module has been programmed with the current system soft-
ware by means of the System Maintenance Manager (see Section 5.10.2 on page 111). If neces-
sary, perform a software update.
4. Restore the parameters by means of the Config Transfer function (see Section 5.13), performed on
another Display Electronics Unit or from the backup diskette (some transceiver parameters can also
be restored from the TCU). If the Config Transfer function or a backup diskette is not available, the
system must be parameterized manually. See Section 6 from page 157 on for further information.
5. Check the system configuration and test whether the radar is functioning correctly.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 193

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.6.9 Exchange of the Analog Interface
To exchange the Analog Interface, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
WARNING
If a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Interface,
dangerous voltages might be present, even although all supplies to the
radar system are switched off. Short circuiting of the gyro will damage
the gyro output.
1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the Analog Interface.
2. The Analog Interface is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
3. Set the jumpers on the new Analog Interface pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
5. Switch on the power to the radar.
internet).
7. The Analog Interface contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the
RDC and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are auto-
matically sent from the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface.
8.6.10 Exchange of the COM Expander
To exchange the COM Expander, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
1. Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the COM Expander.
2. Remove all plug-in adapter pcbs from the defective pcb and connect them to the corresponding slot
of the spare part.
3. The COM Expander is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
4. Set the jumpers on the new COM Expander pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
5. Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
6. Switch on the power to the radar.
internet).
194 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8. The COM Expander contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the RDC
and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are sent from
the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface automatically.
8.6.11 Exchange of the Diskette Drive
To exchange the diskette drive, the drive unit must

be removed as described in Section 5.1 from page
86 on.
For the correct connection of the data cable at the
diskette drive, see Figure 8-5.
ztr1_200.jpg
Fig. 8-5 Connection of the data cable at the diskette

drive
8.6.12 Exchange of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply
To exchange the power supply, switch off the radar, disconnect the mains supply cable and open the
1. Disconnect all supply cables (power supply output).
2. The power supply unit is mounted by means of 4 screws. Two of them must be removed at the rear
(outside) of the electronics unit housing; the other two screws must be removed inside the housing.
3. Fix the new power supply by means of the screws and connect the supply cables.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 195

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.6.13 Exchange of Filter Pads
The filter pad of the Display Electronics Unit’s

housing must be changed or washed with a mild
detergent every 3 months. If the Display Electronics
Unit is installed in a dusty environment, the replace-
ment or cleaning must be done more often.
The filter pad can be exchanged without tools. It is
trapped under the metal cover of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit’s fan outlet. Remove it at the cover
corner which is not fixed by a screw.
The part number of the filter pad is:
GE3044T030, order No. 2175640.
Washed filter pads must be allowed to dry
completely.
ztr1_062.jpg
Location of the filter pad
8.6.14 Exchange of Fans
8.6.14.1 Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing
To remove the fan, open the cover of the housing. Disconnect the fan and unscrew the four nuts on the
housing of the fan. Exchange the fan and fix the new one with the four nuts. Connect the fan to the supply
and close the housing of the Display Electronics Unit. It is advisable to check the filter pad (see Section
8.6.13) on this occasion.
8.6.14.2 Exchange of the Processor Fan
If the fan of the main processor of the motherboard is defective, it is possible that the main processor
itself is damaged, too. The function of the main processor should be tested. Depending on the type of
processor, the lifetime of this component can be reduced drastically or destroyed within a few minutes if
it is allowed to run without a fan.
The method of exchanging the fan depends on the main processor type. Usually, the fan is fixed with
metal clamps which can be opened carefully by means of a small screwdriver. The fan must be
connected to a 3-pole connector on the motherboard next to the processor socket. This connector is
marked by a printed label on the motherboard pcb.
NOTE:
and the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.
196 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.7 Maintenance
8.7 Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance of the radar is limited to the following tasks:
Work Interval Remarks
Exchanging or cleaning the filter Every 3 months, depending on Nevertheless, it makes sense to check the
pad of the Display Electronics the dustiness of the environ- pad whenever maintenance or repair work
Unit ment; operator’s maintenance has to be done.
work
Checking the housing fan and the Whenever maintenance or
CPU fan of the electronics unit repair work has been done
Exchanging the CMOS backup See the hints in Section 8.6.4 on page
battery Every 5 years. 192.
It is not necessary to exchange the gear lubricant oil.
8.8 Spare Parts
8.8.1 Spare Part Concept
Most of the components in the Display Electronics Unit are parts which cannot be serviced. In the case
of a defect, the complete part must be exchanged.
8.8.2 Spare Parts List
Some of the components of the Display Electronics Unit in particular will be modified at short intervals,
so that it is likely that it will not be possible to deliver spare parts which are absolutely identical to the
original part. In such cases, a Technote for the exchange is delivered with the spare part and new
versions of components are added to this manual as soon as possible.
Electronics Unit GE3066/GE3064/GE3065

Part Order No.
Motherboard with 1000 MHz Main Processor, Fan and Memory Module (Motherboard DFI 300006104
CA64-TN) (GE3044G066)
ATX Power Supply (FSP300-60FPN) 300004624
Fan (3412N for Electronics Unit Housing) 5035335
Filter pad (GE3044T030, 110x110 mm) for Electronics Unit 2175640
Ethernet Module with Y-plug (LCS-8034TB) 300006169
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G213) 300006090
RDC pcb (GE3044G219) 300005324
Set of Cables GE3044 (GE3062G005) 390001276
DVD-ROM drive (CD-ROM drive), MULTIPILOT only 390001331
Hard Disk Drive (40 GByte) 390000261
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 197

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.8 Spare Parts Technical Manual
Part Order No.

Connector (female, supplying Operating Unit / Diskette Drive, T3303100) 5321296
CMOS backup battery CR2032 271126851
IDE Module with software (GE3062G001) 390002052
Interconnection Box VS3034

Part Order No.
Interconnection Board (GE3044G216) 300005044
Fuse Kit (VS3034G005) 390001271
Fuse, Analog Interface, F1, 0.5 A, slow blow 5070558
Fuses, Interconnection Board
F1, 6.3 A, slow blow 5071038
F2, 6.3 A, slow blow 5071038
F3, 4.0 A, slow blow 5073585
F4, 0.1 A, slow blow 5070551
F5, 1.0 A, slow blow 5070561
COM Expander (GE3044G210) 300004738
Analog Interface pcb (Gyro/Log Interface, GE3044G207) 2571304
Analog Interface Kit (GE3044G059, Log/Gyro Interface) 2576100
RGB Buffer Kit (GE3044G062) 390000923
Plug-in pcb TTL (GE3044G211) 300004562
Plug-in pcb 20 mA current loop (TTY) (GE3044G212) 300004561
Plug-in pcb RS232 (GE3044G214) 300004560
Plug-in pcb RS422/RS485 (GE3044G218) 300004559
Modification Kit for Plug-in Adapter pcbs (VS3034G005) 390002198
Operating Unit BD3027

Part Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872
Radar Keyboard (0822/01) 5933833
TRACKPILOT Keyboard (0832/01) 5933831
Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 300004763
Fuse for GE3048G200, F1, 2.0 A, slow blow (SMD, 0454 002) 300005060
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186
Trackball BD3028
Part Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01) 5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00) 5930872
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit 2776186
198 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 8.8 Spare Parts
Interswitch (PCI)
Part Order No.
Processor Controlled Interswitch Board 1894740
(PCI, NG3013G205)
8.8.3 Spare Parts for Monitors
The spare parts lists for the monitors are contained in the monitor service manuals.
If a monitor is not intended for service/repair, a separate technical manual is not available for this monitor.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 199

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
8.8 Spare Parts Technical Manual
200 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 9 Technical Data
Technical Manual 9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions
9 Technical Data
9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions
The Gearboxes and Scanners comply with DIN EN 60945 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results).
The system of protection required for the Gearbox by DIN EN 60945 is not valid for internal parts of the
Gearbox.
All components, except of the Scanner and the Gearbox (in Version A including the Transceiver Elec-
tronics Unit) belong to the category "protected from the weather".
The Scanner and the Gearbox (in version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the
category "exposed to the weather".
9.2 Performance
9.2.1 Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219
General Characteristics
- CMOS RAM with 32 kB
- 4 serial interfaces RS422
- 4 alarm outputs, 2 alarm inputs
- 2 CAN bus interfaces for Radar Bus and Nav Bus
Characteristics of the Radar Video Processing

- Possible RPM of the antenna: 23 RPM, 28 RPM, 46 RPM, 56 RPM
- Max. ship’s speed: 70 kt
- Max. ship’s rate of turn: 1200°/min
- Pulse length: variable from 80 to 1000 ns
- Azimuth resolution: 1024 sweeps/circle = 0.35°
- Transformation: 1024 sweeps/360°
- Max. PRF for receiving: 4 kHz
- Max. PRF for processing: 2 kHz
- Ranges: 0.25 / 0.5 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 24 / 48 / 96 NM and
additionally two metric ranges with 250 / 500 m
- Off-centre range: max. 75%
- X/Y memory: 1024x1024x8 bit
- DSP clock frequency: 50 Mhz
- Video transmission to GVP: 15 Hz or higher
Characteristic of the ARPA Functionality

Tracks
- Maximum number of targets: 50
- Range: 20 NM
- Max. speed (HSC, IEC 80/149 (936-2) D.1): true 70 kt
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 201

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9 Technical Data RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
9.2 Performance Technical Manual
Manual target acquisition

- Min. distance: 0.01 NM
- Max. distance: 20 NM
- Time until track stable: about 10 turns
- Time until course and speed stable: about 15 turns
Automatic target acquisition:
- Min. distance: 0.5 NM
- Max. distance: 20 NM
• Number of target acquisition rings: 2
• Number of target acquisition sectors: 2
Maximum own ship’s speed: 70 kt
9.2.2 Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213
- Resolution: at least 1024 x 768 and 1280 x 1024 pixels

- Vertical refresh rate: at least 70 Hz in all resolutions
- Color depth: at least 256 colours
- Bus frequency: compatible with 100 MHz bus
9.2.3 Performance Data of the Analog Interface
- Microcontroller Siemens SAB 80C167CR with the following specifications:

- 2 kB internal RAM
- 2 kB XRAM
- 56 interrupt sources with 16 possible priority levels and separate interrupt vectors
- 16 A/D converters
- 9 timers (16 bit)
- 2 serial interfaces
- Programmable watchdog timer
- Bootstrap loader
- CAN controller
- Data memory 128 k x 8 bit RAM
- Parameter memory 256 k x 6 bit EEPROM
- Program memory 128 k x 8 bit flash-ROM
- AIS interface (RS422) (≥Rev.03)
9.2.4 Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)
- Maximum resolution: 1280 x 1024 pixels

- Maximum vertical refresh rate: 75 Hz
- Maximum horizontal rate: 80 kHz
- Pixel clock: 135 MHz
Current consumption of the RGB Buffer board: about 190 mA
202 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 9.2 Performance
9.2.5 Performance Data of the Electronics Unit’s Power Supply
The power supply units conform to the ATX specification.

- Mains voltage: 115 V / 230 V (switchable or automatic full range)
FSP300-60PFN:
- Max. mains consumption: 115 V/10 A, 230 V/5 A, 50...60 Hz
- Output power: 300 W
- Output voltages/currents:
Voltage Current
+3.3 V 28.0 A
+5 V 30.0 A
+12 V 15.0 A
-12 V 0.8 A
-5 V 0.3 A
+5 V stand-by 2.0 A
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 203

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9.3 External Interfaces Technical Manual
9.3 External Interfaces
The Antenna Unit and the Transceiver have no external interfaces. The interfaces of the Display Elec-
tronics Unit are described in Section 4.5.9. For the IEC 61162 interfaces, see the corresponding service
manual.
9.3.1 Analog Interface
The interfaces for the analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and the pulse log can be parameterized for
different systems. For further information about the Analog Interface, see Section 4.5.10.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
9.3.1.1 Analog Gyro
Input voltage ranges: <35 V or >35 V (set by parameterization)

Bearing resolution: 1/6° (typical) or 1/3°
Sensor type: AC, DC
Reference frequency: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
9.3.1.2 Pulse Log
Number of axes: 1 (X-axis) or 2 (X-, Y-axis)

Number of pulses per NM: 125, 200
Inversion of the following signals is possible: BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
Input Function
X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
XPM voltage can be configured in the service menus.
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
YPM voltage can be configured in the service menus.
BT Bottom track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can
be configured in the service menus.
Water track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be
WT configured in the service menus.
External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
ST2 input by jumper settings. See Section 4.5.10.
9.3.2 COM Expander
4 serial interfaces which can be converted individually by means of plug-in adapter pcbs to RS232/
RS422/RS485/TTL/TTY.
204 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 9.4 Power Supply
9.4 Power Supply
9.4.1 Display Electronics Unit
The mains supply required for the monitor depends on the type of monitor. See the monitor service
manual. The keyboards are supplied with power by the Display Electronics Unit. The maximum power
consumption of the power supply of the Display Electronics Unit is about 115 V / 7.4 A or 230 V / 4 A. The
ATX power supply unit has a maximum power output of 350 W.
9.4.1.1 Operating Unit
The Operating Unit must be supplied with power via the PS/2 connector and the keyboard illumination
must be supplied with power via an additional cable from the Display Electronics Unit.
The voltage supply is: 5 V DC ±10%
The following currents have been measured:
- All LEDs at max. brightness 490 mA
- Without background illumination, 110 mA
status display at max. brightness
- Without background illumination 50 mA
and status display
9.5 Dimensions and Weights
For dimensions and weights, see the technical drawings. The drawings are shown in Section 13.
9.6 Compass Safe Distances
Standard Standard Steering compass

compass Steering compass compass reduced reduced
BD3028 Trackball 2.50 m 1.30 m
Desktop Unit 2.25 m 1.10 m 1.35 m 0.70 m
19", AZ3068
Desktop Unit
23.1", AZ3063 2.50 m 1.50 m 1.50 m 0.90 m
GE3062, GE3064,
GE3065 Electronics 0.45 m 0.30 m 0.30 m 0.30 m
Unit
Interconnection Box 0.50 m 0.40 m 0.30 m 0.30 m
GE3041
Interswitch 1.50 m 0.90 m 0.90 m 0.55 m
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 205

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9.6 Compass Safe Distances Technical Manual
206 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 10 System Faults
Technical Manual 10.1 System Fault Messages
10 System Faults
10.1 System Fault Messages
The following system faults are indicated by means of texts but not by means of codes.
Error Description
CONFIG TP SPECIAL DIFFER The "Special Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-
(additional acoustic signal) spond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP SYSTEM DIFFER The "System Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-
CONFIG TP USER DIFFER The "User Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond
(additional acoustic signal) with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACK-
PILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP INTERFACE DIFFER The "Interface Basic Setup" parameters saved in this Indicator do
(additional acoustic signal) not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT.
The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured
correctly.
CONFIG TP ADVANCED DIFFER The "Advanced Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not corre-
CONFIG TP RUDDER 1&2 DIFFER The "Rudder 1&2 or Azimuth Thruster 1&2" parameters saved in
(additional acoustic signal) this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the
TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be
configured correctly.
CONFIG EI PARAM. DIFFER The Engine Interface parameters saved in this Indicator do not
(additional acoustic signal) correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
NEW INDICATOR CONFIG FILE A new set of parameters has been transmitted to the Indicator
from a second Indicator. The message cannot be acknowledged.
It disappears when the Indicator has been restarted and therefore
the new set of parameters is in use.
INTERSWITCH ADJUST The Interswitch (PCI) is switched to service mode.
INDICATOR SERVICE SWITCH The Indicator of this radar is switched to service mode (hardware
switch). Programming of parameters and system configuration is
possible.
10.2 AIS Faults
If a UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit is connected, see the technical manual of the AIS electronics unit
for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 207

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
10.3 System Fault Code List Technical Manual
10.3 System Fault Code List
The system fault codes are constantly under development. This list will be updated as often as possible.
The list also contains the fault codes for the Transceiver Electronics Unit.
Abbreviations:
General:
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check PCB Printed Circuit Board
DMA Direct Memory Access PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
EOT End Of Text QUEUE Kind of FIFO Memory
LEC Last Error Code ROT Rate-Of-Turn Sensor
NAK Negative Acknowledge SIO Serial Input Output (Serial COMM Port)
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association WIND
(standard for interfacing marine electronic Wind Sensor
devices)
Devices:
AIS AIS system, see AIS manuals NAVBUS CAN1 Bus
Interswitch (Processor Controlled Inter-
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (RDC) PCI switch)
CFG Configuration RDC Radar Data Converter
FSYS File System RKE Remote Keyboard Electronics
GYRO Non NMEA serial gyro systems SI9600 Ship’s Interface
LAN LAN Network SP SPEEDPILOT
MDB Track Data Base TP TRACKPILOT
MON Monitor TRM Transceiver (CUT/TCU)
MSI Analog Interface (Gyro/Log I/F) PCB
Subdevices:
ADC Analog/Digital Converter GYRO Gyro
BITE Built-In Test Equipment IND Radar Indicator (Display Electronic Unit)
CAN-KBC (Remote Keyboard Electronics
CAN_KB CAN-Bus) IVSC Part of RDC PCB
CAN0 Radar Bus LOG Log Sensor
CAN1 Navigation Bus MC Microcontroller
COMM Communication (generic) MPS Map Planning Station (Planning System)
CONFIG Configuration (System Configuration) POS Position Sensor
Conrac Monitor Manufacturer PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
CPOOL Memory Pool PS/2 PS/2 interface
DEPTH Depth Sensor QUEUE Queue System
DOLOG DOLOG Sensor RAM Random Access Memory
DPM Dual-Ported Memory ROM Read Only Memory
DRIVER Device Driver ROT Rate of Turn
DRV Driver SIO Serial Input/Output
Internal system resources (e.g. CPU
DSP Digital Signal Processor SYSTEM timer)
EEPROM Electrically Erasable PROM UART UART
208 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual 10.3 System Fault Code List
System Faults:
Error Device Subdevice Info Recommended Action
00131 FSYS Root filesystem checksum error
00132 FSYS File system error 2
00141 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam corrupt

00142 CFG CONFIG configuration file R10k.sam was corrupt
00143 CFG CONFIG bad chart function license key
00501 RSC1 DRIVER device not found

00502 RSC1 DRIVER video DMA timeout
00503 RSC1 COMM timeout error
00504 RSC1 COMM timeout warning
00505 RSC1 COMM receive pool empty
00506 RSC1 COMM send pool empty
00507 RSC1 COMM received unmatched message type
00508 RSC1 COMM received unexpected message
00509 RSC1 COMM reset timeout error
00511 RSC1 DSP1 startup BITE failure
00512 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-Bus overrun
00513 RSC1 DSP1 PCI-DMA failure
00521 RSC1 DSP2 startup BITE failure
00522 RSC1 DSP2 sweep DMA overrun
00523 RSC1 DSP2 antenna azimuth step overflow
00524 RSC1 DSP2 sweep read timeout
00531 RSC1 IVSC TVA sync start error
00532 RSC1 IVSC TVA antenna azimuth data error
00533 RSC1 IVSC control fault
00601 MON1 Ser1 NAK received

00602 MON1 Ser1 EOT not found
00603 MON1 Ser1 checksum error
00604 MON1 Ser1 invalid telegram
00605 MON1 Ser1 invalid command
00606 MON1 Ser1 timeout, or monitor switched off
01101 RDC1 SIO1 receive pool empty

01102 RDC1 SIO1 receive FIFO full
01103 RDC1 SIO1 receive buffer insufficient
01104 RDC1 SIO1 send pool empty
01105 RDC1 SIO1 send FIFO full
01106 RDC1 SIO1 send buffer insufficient
01107 RDC1 SIO1 illegal interrupt
01108 RDC1 SIO1 unexpected transmit interrupt
01111 RDC1 SIO1 binary: lost block
01112 RDC1 SIO1 binary: lost bytes
01113 RDC1 SIO1 binary: checksum error
01115 RDC1 SIO1 gyro: lost bytes
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 209

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01117 RDC1 SIO1 STXETX: lost bytes
01121 RDC1 SIO1 chip: overrun error
01122 RDC1 SIO1 chip: parity error
01123 RDC1 SIO1 chip: framing error



210 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01501 RDC1 CAN0 initialization error

01502 RDC1 CAN0 receive pool empty
01503 RDC1 CAN0 receive FIFO full
01504 RDC1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
01505 RDC1 CAN0 send pool empty
01506 RDC1 CAN0 send FIFO full
01507 RDC1 CAN0 send buffer insufficient
01508 RDC1 CAN0 unexpected transmit interrupt
01511 RDC1 CAN0 lost message
01512 RDC1 CAN0 message checksum error
01513 RDC1 CAN0 lost frame
01514 RDC1 CAN0 illegal frame type
01515 RDC1 CAN0 transmit request hang
01516 RDC1 CAN0 ghost interrupt
01517 RDC1 CAN0 receive overrun
01521 RDC1 CAN0 chip: warning
01522 RDC1 CAN0 chip: bus off
01523 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: no error
01524 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error
01525 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: form error
01526 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
01527 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error
01529 RDC1 CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error
01601 RDC1 CAN1 initialization error

01602 RDC1 CAN1 receive pool empty
01603 RDC1 CAN1 receive FIFO full
01604 RDC1 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
01605 RDC1 CAN1 send pool empty
01606 RDC1 CAN1 send FIFO full
01607 RDC1 CAN1 send buffer insufficient
01608 RDC1 CAN1 unexpected transmit interrupt
01611 RDC1 CAN1 lost message
01612 RDC1 CAN1 message checksum error
01613 RDC1 CAN1 lost frame
01614 RDC1 CAN1 illegal frame type
01615 RDC1 CAN1 transmit request hang
01616 RDC1 CAN1 ghost interrupt
01617 RDC1 CAN1 receive overrun
01621 RDC1 CAN1 chip: warning
01622 RDC1 CAN1 chip: bus off
01623 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: no error
01624 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: stuff error
01625 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: form error
01626 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
01629 RDC1 CAN1 chip: LEC: CRC error
01801 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (generic)

01802 LAN1 DRV send fifo full (AIS)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 211

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

01810 LAN1 DRV send error (generic)
01811 LAN1 DRV send error (AIS)
01820 LAN1 DRV receive error (generic)
01821 LAN1 DRV receive error (AIS)
01851 PIXMAP DRV send fifo full

01860 PIXMAP DRV send error
01870 PIXMAP DRV receive error
01901 MDB system track read error

01902 MDB track catalog read error
02011 TRM COMM checkword timeout

02012 TRM COMM checkword error
02013 TRM COMM protocol failure
02014 TRM COMM receive failure
02015 TRM COMM send failure
02021 TRM CONFIG X/S-Band mismatch
02022 TRM CONFIG generation mismatch (R9600/R1000)
02100 TRM SYSTEM clock failure
02124 TRM RAM error
02125 TRM ROM error
02130 TRM IND1 invalid message type
02135 TRM IND1 setup data 1 incomplete
02140 TRM IND1 invalid sector count value
02145 TRM IND1 transmit data timeout
02150 TRM IND1 invalid frequency deviation
02155 TRM IND1 reset handling error
02160 TRM IND1 plausibility check failed
212 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02165 TRM IND1 setup data absent
02170 TRM IND1 checkword error
02175 TRM IND1 checkword timeout
02180 TRM IND1 invalid transmit data
02185 TRM IND1 invalid mode request
02190 TRM IND1 invalid indicator number
02195 TRM IND1 invalid PM parameter
02205 TRM IND1 invalid PM video (PMV) threshold
02210 TRM IND1 setup data 2 absent
02215 TRM IND1 invalid SEA (STC) curve
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 213

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02220 TRM IND1 invalid potentiometer curve
02270 TRM ADC interrupt tune
02271 TRM ADC interrupt auto SEA (STC)
02272 TRM invalid pulse per revolution count
02274 TRM invalid transceiver number
02275 TRM no antenna rotation
02276 TRM no external trigger
02277 TRM external trigger exceeds minimum
02278 TRM external trigger exceeds maximum
02279 TRM magnetron current failure - Check F1 on the Power Supply
Unit NG3028G202
- Check the correct functioning of
the HV supply switch in the
transceiver housing/Gearbox.
- Exchange the Pulse Generator
NG3028G203 or NG3028G206
02280 TRM magnetron fatal error - Exchange Magnetron
- Exchange TCU NG3028G201
- Exchange Power Supply
NG3028G 202
- Exchange Mains Transformer
NG3028G007 X-Band or
NG3029G007 (S-Band)
02281 TRM no trigger
02300 TRM CAN0 checkword timeout
02301 TRM CAN0 checkword error
02302 TRM CAN0 invalid CAN object number
02303 TRM CAN0 invalid message type
02304 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in progress)
02305 TRM CAN0 send overrun (in queue)
02310 TRM CAN0 unknown error
02311 TRM CAN0 invalid parameter
02312 TRM CAN0 invalid write max value
02313 TRM CAN0 standard: checksum error
02314 TRM CAN0 standard: invalid block count
02315 TRM CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
02316 TRM CAN0 chip: reset hang
02317 TRM CAN0 invalid interrupt
02318 TRM CAN0 standard: lost block
02319 TRM CAN0 short pool empty
02320 TRM CAN0 long pool empty
02321 TRM CAN0 chip: bus off
02322 TRM CAN0 re-initialization error
02405 TRM BITE test not available
02406 TRM BITE BITE still active
02407 TRM BITE BITE inactive
02410 TRM BITE test not available
02411 TRM DPM select error
02412 TRM DPM lower RAM error
214 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

02413 TRM DPM upper RAM error
02414 TRM ADC conversion error
02420 TRM supply voltage error
02500 TRM EEPROM checksum error
02501 TRM EEPROM write timeout
02502 TRM EEPROM first time initialization (new device)
02503 TRM SYSTEM controller watchdog
02504 TRM SYSTEM stack overflow
02505 TRM SYSTEM stack underflow
02506 TRM SYSTEM undefined operation
02507 TRM SYSTEM protection fault
02508 TRM SYSTEM illegal word access
02509 TRM SYSTEM illegal instruction access
02510 TRM ADC limit error: +5 V
02513 TRM ADC limit error: -15 V
02515 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: stuff error
02516 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: acknowledge error
02517 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 1 error
02518 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: bit 0 error
02519 TRM CAN0 chip: LEC: CRC error
02520 TRM no video
02521 TRM magnetron operation hours limit
02522 TRM EEPROM data compare error
02523 TRM try high speed antenna without option
02524 TRM magnetron heating voltage error
02525 TRM magnetron bias current error
02526 TRM adjust magnetron currents
03010 NAVBUS checkword timeout

03011 NAVBUS checkword error
03012 NAVBUS incompatible version
03013 NAVBUS no navigation data from sensor master
03014 NAVBUS fast gyro timeout
03020 NAVBUS multiple sensor master
03101 SI9600 CPOOL error (1..3)

03102 SI9600 CPOOL invalid pool
03103 SI9600 CPOOL invalid buffer
03104 SI9600 CPOOL pool empty
03111 SI9600 QUEUE error (1..4)
03112 SI9600 QUEUE receive event w/o buffer
03113 SI9600 QUEUE invalid queue
03114 SI9600 QUEUE invalid buffer
03115 SI9600 QUEUE BAB pool empty
03124 SI9600 RAM error
03125 SI9600 ROM error
03130 SI9600 EEPROM checksum error
03131 SI9600 EEPROM erase error
03132 SI9600 EEPROM write hang
03133 SI9600 EEPROM data error
03135 SI9600 LOG invalid configuration
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 215

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03136 SI9600 LOG VX noise
03137 SI9600 LOG VY noise
03138 SI9600 POS invalid configuration
03139 SI9600 CONFIG reset missing
03140 SI9600 CONFIG data changed
03141 SI9600 WIND double source
03142 SI9600 DEPTH double source
03143 SI9600 CONFIG SI to SI error
03150 SI9600 GYRO sample start missing
03151 SI9600 GYRO RST phase error
03152 SI9600 GYRO phase jumping
03153 SI9600 GYRO RST oscillating
03154 SI9600 GYRO CAN id 16 timeout
03155 SI9600 GYRO serial data timeout
03156 SI9600 ROT serial data timeout
03157 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: serial data error
03158 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: serial data error
03159 SI9600 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error
03160 SI9600 ROT C.Plath: checksum error
03161 SI9600 GYRO NMEA: serial data error
03162 SI9600 ROT NMEA: serial data error
03163 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: serial data error
03164 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: serial data error
03165 SI9600 GYRO serial data jumping
03166 SI9600 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error
03167 SI9600 ROT Anschuetz: checksum error
03168 SI9600 COMPASS reference error
03169 SI9600 COMPASS difference error
03170 SI9600 SIO pool initialization error
03171 SI9600 SIO pool back
03172 SI9600 SIO pool empty
03173 SI9600 SIO buffer insufficient
03211 SI9600 SIO1 send timeout
03212 SI9600 SIO1 receive error
03213 SI9600 SIO1 send error
03214 SI9600 SIO1 invalid message length
03215 SI9600 SIO1 checkword timeout
03216 SI9600 SIO1 data timeout
216 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03290 SI9600 MPS checkword timeout
03291 SI9600 MPS checkword error
03292 SI9600 MPS track checksum error
03300 SI9600 CAN1 checkword timeout
03301 SI9600 CAN1 checkword error
03302 SI9600 CAN1 invalid CAN object number
03303 SI9600 CAN1 invalid message type
03304 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in progress)
03305 SI9600 CAN1 send overrun (in queue)
03310 SI9600 CAN1 unknown error
03311 SI9600 CAN1 invalid parameter
03312 SI9600 CAN1 invalid write max value
03313 SI9600 CAN1 standard: checksum error
03314 SI9600 CAN1 standard: invalid block count
03315 SI9600 CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
03316 SI9600 CAN1 chip: reset hang
03317 SI9600 CAN1 invalid interrupt
03318 SI9600 CAN1 standard: lost block
03319 SI9600 CAN1 short pool empty
03320 SI9600 CAN1 long pool empty
03321 SI9600 CAN1 chip: bus off
03330 SI9600 CAN1 pool back
03331 SI9600 CAN1 pool empty
03401 SI9600 SIO1 checksum error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 217

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03410 SI9600 DOLOG invalid message length
03411 SI9600 DOLOG sensor timeout
03412 SI9600 DOLOG speed timeout
03413 SI9600 DOLOG depth timeout
03498 SI9600 invalid configuration
03500 SI9600 BITE test not available
03614 AIS SIR10T receive failure

03615 AIS SIR10T send failure
03616 AIS SIR10T SIR10T timeout
03617 AIS AIS AIS timeout
03701 GYRO C.Plath: 01 - Failure of gyro power supply

03702 GYRO C.Plath: 02 - Reset of the controller
03703 GYRO C.Plath: 03 - Computer is in test mode or dip-
switch ’External Synchronisation’ closed
03704 GYRO C.Plath: 04 - RAM internal error
03705 GYRO C.Plath: 05 - RAM external error
03706 GYRO C.Plath: 06 - PROM checksum error
03707 GYRO C.Plath: 07 - Heading error at 2 deg light
barrier
03708 GYRO C.Plath: 08 - Heading error at 360 deg light
barrier
03709 GYRO C.Plath: 09 - Failure of 2 deg light barrier
03710 GYRO C.Plath: 10 - Failure of 360 deg light barrier
03711 GYRO C.Plath: 11 - Watchdog alarm
03712 GYRO C.Plath: 12 - Heading not synchronized
03713 GYRO C.Plath: 13 - Reset after Power-Down-Mode
03714 GYRO C.Plath: 14 - RAM-Power alarm
03715 GYRO C.Plath: 15 - AD-Failure
03716 GYRO C.Plath: checksum error
03717 GYRO C.Plath: sync bit error
03718 GYRO C.Plath: message size error
03719 GYRO C.Plath: magnetic compass
03721 GYRO Anschuetz: second gyro differs
03722 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro invalid
03723 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro phase < 45 deg
03724 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro settling phase
03725 GYRO Anschuetz: sensor not available
03726 GYRO Anschuetz: heading jumping
03727 GYRO Anschuetz: checksum error
03728 GYRO Anschuetz: high bit error
03729 GYRO Anschuetz: system error
03730 GYRO Anschuetz: gyro error
03740 GYRO GYRO heading jump
03801 SI1 RAM error

03802 SI1 ROM error
03803 SI1 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error
03804 SI1 CAN1 buffer error
03805 SI1 CAN1 protocol error
03806 SI1 EEPROM error
218 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03807 SI1 MC system error
03809 SI1 GYRO RST combination error
03810 SI1 GYRO RST step size error
03811 SI1 GYRO reference timeout
03812 SI1 GYRO error input
03813 SI1 LOG error input
03814 SI1 LOG VX input error
03815 SI1 LOG VY input error
03816 SI1 AIS target overflow
03817 SI1 COMM checkword timeout
03818 SI1 COMM checkword error
03819 SI1 COMM incompatible version
03820 SI1 COMM invalid message type
03824 SI1 CPOOL CPOOL error
03825 SI1 CPOOL Pool bad
03826 SI1 CPOOL Buffer bad
03827 SI1 CPOOL Pool empty
03828 SI1 QUEUE Queue error
03829 SI1 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer
03830 SI1 QUEUE Queue bad
03831 SI1 QUEUE Buffer bad
03833 SI1 LOG Configuration fault
03834 SI1 UART1 Read error
03835 SI1 UART1 Write error
03836 SI1 UART1 Message length ill
03837 SI1 UART1 Data time-out
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 219

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03866 SI1 CAN1 No check
03867 SI1 CAN1 Bad check
03868 SI1 CAN1 Bad object ID
03869 SI1 CAN1 Bad transfer number
03870 SI1 CAN1 Send in progress
03871 SI1 CAN1 Send in queue
03872 SI1 CAN1 Unknown error
03873 SI1 CAN1 Bad parameters
03874 SI1 CAN1 Bad write maximum
03875 SI1 CAN1 Bad checksum
03876 SI1 CAN1 Bad block count
03877 SI1 CAN1 Receive buffer too small
03878 SI1 CAN1 Reset hang
03879 SI1 CAN1 Bad interrupt
03880 SI1 CAN1 Lost data block
03881 SI1 CAN1 Short pool empty
03882 SI1 CAN1 Long pool empty
03883 SI1 CAN1 Bus error
03884 SI1 CAN1 Send bool back
03885 SI1 CAN1 Send bool empty
03886 SI1 UART1 Checksum error
03894 SI1 SI Configuration wrong
03895 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro time out
03896 SI1 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error
03901 SI2 RAM error

03902 SI2 ROM error
03903 SI2 CAN1 chip: LEC: frame error
03904 SI2 CAN1 buffer error
03905 SI2 CAN1 protocol error
03906 SI2 EEPROM error
03907 SI2 MC system error
03909 SI2 GYRO RST combination error
03910 SI2 GYRO RST step size error
03911 SI2 GYRO reference timeout
03912 SI2 GYRO error input
03913 SI2 LOG error input
03914 SI2 LOG VX input error
03915 SI2 LOG VY input error
03916 SI2 AIS target overflow
03917 SI2 COMM checkword timeout
03918 SI2 COMM checkword error
03919 SI2 COMM incompatible version
03920 SI2 COMM invalid message type
220 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03924 SI2 CPOOL CPOOL error
03925 SI2 CPOOL Pool bad
03926 SI2 CPOOL Buffer bad
03927 SI2 CPOOL Pool empty
03928 SI2 QUEUE Queue error
03929 SI2 QUEUE Rx ev w/o buffer
03930 SI2 QUEUE Queue bad
03931 SI2 QUEUE Buffer bad
03933 SI2 LOG Configuration fault
03966 SI2 CAN1 No check
03967 SI2 CAN1 Bad check
03968 SI2 CAN1 Bad object ID
03969 SI2 CAN1 Bad transfer number
03970 SI2 CAN1 Send in progress
03971 SI2 CAN1 Send in queue
03972 SI2 CAN1 Unknown error
03973 SI2 CAN1 Bad parameters
03974 SI2 CAN1 Bad write maximum
03975 SI2 CAN1 Bad checksum
03976 SI2 CAN1 Bad block count
03977 SI2 CAN1 Receive buffer too small
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 221

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

03978 SI2 CAN1 Reset hang
03979 SI2 CAN1 Bad interrupt
03980 SI2 CAN1 Lost data block
03981 SI2 CAN1 Short pool empty
03982 SI2 CAN1 Long pool empty
03983 SI2 CAN1 Bus error
03984 SI2 CAN1 Send bool back
03985 SI2 CAN1 Send bool empty
03994 SI2 SI Configuration wrong
03995 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro time out
03996 SI2 GYRO Serial gyro tlgm error
04010 RDC1 ARPA azimuth fault

04011 RDC1 ARPA video interrupt timeout
04020 RDC1 ARPA video offset low, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
04021 RDC1 ARPA video offset high, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
04022 RDC1 ARPA video gain low, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust or too much SEA(STC)
04023 RDC1 ARPA video gain high, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
04100 RDC1 ARPA target acquired twice
04101 RDC1 ARPA target distance small
04102 RDC1 ARPA no sweeps in video memory
04103 RDC1 ARPA sweep to sweep angle small
04104 RDC1 ARPA unexpected change of sweep to sweep angle
04105 RDC1 ARPA time per revolution small
04106 RDC1 ARPA PRF out of limits
04107 RDC1 ARPA target bearing not in video memory
04108 RDC1 ARPA target bearing disappeared in video memory
04109 RDC1 ARPA target speed out of limit
04110 RDC1 ARPA target size large
04111 RDC1 ARPA shutdown received
05011 PCI1 COMM checkword timeout

05012 PCI1 COMM checkword error
05014 PCI1 COMM receive error
05015 PCI1 COMM send error
05100 PCI1 SYSTEM clock error
05124 PCI1 RAM error
05125 PCI1 ROM error
05130 PCI1 RELAY 0 switch error
222 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

05155 PCI1 RELAY 0 i/o error
05160 PCI1 IND1 invalid inter-switch request
05165 PCI1 IND1 invalid transmit data
05170 PCI1 target device overflow
05171 PCI1 unknown i/o device
05172 PCI1 unable to release CAN chip
05173 PCI1 unable to release relay matrix
05174 PCI1 unable to release i/o relay
05300 PCI1 CAN0 checkword timeout
05301 PCI1 CAN0 checkword error
05302 PCI1 CAN0 invalid CAN object number
05303 PCI1 CAN0 invalid message type
05304 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in progress)
05305 PCI1 CAN0 send overrun (in queue)
05310 PCI1 CAN0 unknown error
05311 PCI1 CAN0 invalid parameter
05312 PCI1 CAN0 invalid write max value
05313 PCI1 CAN0 standard: checksum error
05314 PCI1 CAN0 standard: invalid block count
05315 PCI1 CAN0 receive buffer insufficient
05316 PCI1 CAN0 chip: reset hang
05317 PCI1 CAN0 invalid interrupt
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 223

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

05318 PCI1 CAN0 standard: lost block
05319 PCI1 CAN0 short pool empty
05320 PCI1 CAN0 long pool empty
05321 PCI1 CAN0 chip: bus off
05322 PCI1 CAN0 re-initialization error
05405 PCI1 BITE test not available
05406 PCI1 BITE BITE still active
05407 PCI1 BITE BITE inactive
05410 PCI1 BITE test not available
06001 TP DRIVER checkword timeout

06002 TP DRIVER checkword error
06005 TP DRIVER cancel timeout
06006 TP DRIVER BITE timeout
06007 TP DRIVER no BITE response
06101 TP NAV CPOOL: error (1..3)
06102 TP NAV CPOOL: invalid pool
06103 TP NAV CPOOL: invalid buffer
06104 TP NAV CPOOL: pool empty
06111 TP NAV QUEUE: error (1..4)
06112 TP NAV QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
06113 TP NAV QUEUE: invalid queue
06114 TP NAV QUEUE: invalid buffer
06115 TP NAV QUEUE: BAB pool empty
06124 TP NAV RAM: error
06125 TP NAV ROM: error
06127 TP NAV CMOS-RAM: error
06128 TP NAV Using default paramter for TP
06129 TP NAV Paramter organization bad
06130 TP NAV Paramter general failure
06131 TP NAV Paramter protect hang
06132 TP NAV Paramter lock hang
06133 TP NAV Paramter programming timeout
06134 TP NAV Paramter verify failed
06139 TP NAV Address overflow
06140 TP NAV Parameter user & system invalid
06141 TP NAV Tp settings invalid
06142 TP NAV Parameter special invalid
06143 TP NAV Parameter tp interface invalid
06150 TP NAV Lost data (CAN curve buffer small)
06180 TP NAV Invalid TP configuration (2*TP1 or 2*TP2)
06181 TP NAV Slave system displays wrong control mode
06199 TP NAV Ghost interrupt from PIC
06201 TP NAV Serial message not send
06211 TP NAV SIO receive error
06212 TP NAV SIO send error
06213 TP NAV SIO invalid message length
06214 TP NAV SIO checkword timeout
06215 TP NAV Lost data: SYN TX buffer small
06216 TP NAV Lost data: TP-SYN buffer small
06217 TP NAV Lost data: SP-SYN buffer small
06219 TP NAV Lost data: CHL-SYN buffer small
06220 TP NAV Track checksum error
06221 TP NAV Track parameter 1 error
224 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06226 TP NAV Track checksum error 1
06230 TP NAV Track-Data new
06231 TP NAV Track-Data changed
06232 TP NAV Track-Data not complete
06233 TP NAV Equal Waypoints or Turnpoints following
06234 TP NAV WPT synchronisation disturbed
06235 TP NAV New recalculation of navigation
06236 TP NAV Track lat/lon error
06238 TP NAV WPT-request to fast
06239 TP NAV WPT-request to slow
06240 TP NAV NAV-X/Y overflow
06241 TP NAV NAV-Xrel overflow
06242 TP NAV NAV-Yrel overflow
06243 TP NAV NAV-Delta XB overflow
06244 TP NAV NAV-Delta YB overflow
06245 TP NAV NAV-Delta XC overflow
06246 TP NAV NAV-Delta YC overflow
06247 TP NAV Track checksum error
06250 TP NAV FPU not available
06251 TP NAV FPU initialization error
06252 TP NAV FPU domain error
06253 TP NAV FPU result error
06255 TP NAV FPU test 1 error
06260 TP NAV Position timeout
06261 TP NAV Course/Speed timeout
06262 TP NAV Date/Time timeout
06263 TP NAV WPT-Track timeout
06264 TP NAV Processing timeout
06300 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
06301 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
06302 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
06303 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
06304 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
06305 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
06310 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
06311 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
06312 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
06313 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
06314 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
06315 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
06316 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 225

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06317 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
06318 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
06319 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
06320 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
06321 TP NAV TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
06400 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
06401 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
06402 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
06403 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
06404 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
06405 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in queue)
06410 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown check
06411 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
06412 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
06413 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
06414 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
06415 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
06416 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
06417 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
06418 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
06419 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
06420 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
06421 TP NAV NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
06480 TP NAV CAN send nav pool empty
06481 TP NAV CAN send nav pool back
06501 TP NAV MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
06502 TP NAV MMCI pool is empty
06503 TP NAV MMCI message queue error
06504 TP NAV MMCI pool size too small during initialization
06505 TP NAV MMCI function address is null
06506 TP NAV MMCI received event without buffer queue
06507 TP NAV MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
06508 TP NAV MMCI message queue clear to send timeout
06509 TP NAV MMCI invalid message length received
06510 TP NAV MMCI illegal partition size
06511 TP NAV MMCI lost data during receive
06520 TP NAV TpReg checkword timeout
06521 TP NAV TpReg checkword error
06522 TP NAV TpReg invalid message type
06530 TP NAV TpReg BITE timeout
06549 TP NAV TpReg unknown error code
06551 TP REG MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
06552 TP REG MMCI pool is empty
06553 TP REG MMCI message queue error
06554 TP REG MMCI pool size too small during initialization
06555 TP REG MMCI error function address is null
06556 TP REG MMCI received event without buffer queue
06557 TP REG MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
06558 TP REG MMCI message queue clear to send timeout
06559 TP REG MMCI invalid message length received
06560 TP REG MMCI illegal partition size
06561 TP REG MMCI lost data during receive
06580 TP REG TpNav checkword timeout
226 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06581 TP REG TpNav checkword error
06601 TP REG CPOOL error (1..3)
06602 TP REG CPOOL invalid pool
06603 TP REG CPOOL invalid buffer
06604 TP REG CPOOL pool empty
06611 TP REG QUEUE error (1..4)
06612 TP REG QUEUE receive event w/o buffer
06613 TP REG QUEUE invalid queue
06614 TP REG QUEUE invalid buffer
06615 TP REG QUEUE BAB pool empty
06624 TP REG RAM error
06625 TP REG ROM error
06626 TP REG Missing EEPROM and CMOS data
06699 TP REG Ghost interrupt
06701 TP REG Message to IP not send
06710 TP REG IP receive timeout
06711 TP REG IP receive error
06712 TP REG IP send error
06713 TP REG IP invalid message length received
06714 TP REG IP checkword timeout
06715 TP REG IP checkword error
06716 TP REG IP data not complete
06717 TP REG IP unknown error code
06718 TP REG IP control mode not available
06721 TP RC: RC ROM error
06722 TP RC: RC RAM error
06725 TP RC: RC status fault A/D-converter
06726 TP RC: RC error test signal T1 (AN.-OUT 1)
06727 TP RC: RC error test signal T2 (AN.-OUT 2)
06728 TP RC: RC error test signal T3 (+10V)
06729 TP RC: RC error test signal T4 (-10V)
06730 TP RC: RC set rudder overflow
06731 TP RC: RC ser-RX: parity error
06732 TP RC: RC ser-RX: checksum error
06733 TP RC: RC ser-RX: invalid message type
06738 TP REG serial integr.-control system timeout
06739 TP REG azimuth thruster interface error
06740 TP REG Actual rudder not equal Set-rudder
06741 TP REG Rudder1 not equal Rudder2
06742 TP REG Port rudder failure from extern
06743 TP REG Starboard rudder failure from extern
06744 TP REG Rudder Rate feedback failure
06745 TP REG Single rudder feedback not equal backup feed-
back
06746 TP REG Invalid data for backup feedback
06747 TP REG Invalid data for single rudder feedback
06748 TP REG Invalid data for PRT rudder feedback
06749 TP REG Invalid data for STB rudder feedback
06750 TP REG ROT prediction error
06800 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword timeout
06801 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword error
06802 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid CAN object number
06803 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid message type
06804 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in progress)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 227

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06805 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in queue)
06810 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 unknown error
06811 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid parameter
06812 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid write max value
06813 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: checksum error
06814 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: invalid block count
06815 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
06816 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: reset hang
06817 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid interrupt
06818 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: lost block
06819 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 short pool empty
06820 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 long pool empty
06821 TP REG NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: bus off
06830 TP IP unknown error from IP
06831 TP IP RAM error
06832 TP IP ROM error
06833 TP IP Can bus LEC error
06834 TP IP Can bus buffer error
06835 TP IP Can bus STN protocol error
06836 TP IP Can bus off or warning level
06837 TP IP reserve
06838 TP IP System error watchdog, ...
06839 TP IP Error power supply +15V
06840 TP IP Error power supply -15V
06841 TP IP Error power supply 24V
06842 TP IP Error hold voltage
06843 TP IP TP time out
06844 TP IP Low current poti 1 reference
06848 TP IP Rudder rate feedback failure (STB or Single)
06849 TP IP Rudder rate feedback failure (PRT or Backup)
06850 TP IP Rudder3 rate feedback failure
06856 TP IP Config of rudder input wrong
06857 TP IP Config of rudder output wrong
06858 TP IP Rudder relays failure (STB or Single = K1/K2)
06859 TP IP Rudder relays failure (PRT or Backup = K3/K4)
06860 TP IP reserve
06861 TP IP Relays 1 set error
228 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06873 TP IP SIO pool empty
06874 TP IP SIO FIFO overrun
06875 TP IP Uart 0 error while reading byte
06876 TP IP Uart 0 error while writing byte
06877 TP IP Uart 0 illegal size for message type
06878 TP IP Uart 0 data time out while reading
06879 TP IP Uart 0 checksum error
06905 TP IP Fan rotation failure
06906 TP IP Poti 1 reference short circuit
06910 TP REG Course integration error
06912 TP REG Joystick fault
06914 TP REG Missing position type
06915 TP REG Missing position status
06916 TP REG Trackmode-data wrong update
06917 TP REG Trackmode-data timeout
06918 TP REG Trackmode: OFF COURSE for NEW TRACK
06919 TP REG Trackmode: NEW TRACK in curve
06920 TP REG Trackmode centred
06922 TP REG Invalid curve sequence
06923 TP REG Filtered XTD too large
06929 TP REG Tp gyro fault
06931 TP REG RPM PRT missing
06932 TP REG RPM STB missing
06940 TP IP EEPROM error parameter data
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 229

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

06941 TP IP EEPROM error version data
06942 TP IP EEPROM error Relais device
06943 TP IP EEPROM error Hold device
06944 TP IP EEPROM error Interconnection board
06945 TP IP EEPROM error A/D device
06946 TP IP EEPROM error D/A pcb channel 1
08001 SP DRIVER checkword timeout

08002 SP DRIVER checkword error
08005 SP DRIVER cancel timeout
08006 SP DRIVER BITE timeout
08007 SP DRIVER no BITE response
08010 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of system parameter
08011 SP EEPROM checksum error: transfer of user parameter
08101 SP MC1 CPOOL: error (1..3)
08102 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid pool
08103 SP MC1 CPOOL: invalid buffer
08104 SP MC1 CPOOL: pool empty
08111 SP MC1 QUEUE: error (1..4)
08112 SP MC1 QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
08113 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid queue
08114 SP MC1 QUEUE: invalid buffer
08115 SP MC1 QUEUE: BAB pool empty
08124 SP MC1 RAM: error
08125 SP MC1 ROM: error
08126 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 TP-DMC1 timeout
08127 SP MC1 CMOS-RAM: error
08129 SP MC1 EEPROM organization bad
08130 SP MC1 EEPROM general failure
08131 SP MC1 EEPROM protect hang
08132 SP MC1 EEPROM lock hang
08133 SP MC1 EEPROM programming timeout
08134 SP MC1 EEPROM verify failed
08139 SP MC1 address overflow
08140 SP MC1 EEPROM parameter configuration invalid
08141 SP MC1 EEPROM user/system configuration invalid
08199 SP MC1 ghost interrupt from PIC
08201 SP MC1 serial message not send
08211 SP MC1 SIO receive error
08212 SP MC1 SIO send error
08213 SP MC1 SIO invalid message length
08214 SP MC1 SIO checkword timeout
08215 SP MC1 SIO checkword error
08220 SP MC1 speed timeout
08300 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
08301 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
08302 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
230 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

08303 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
08304 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
08305 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
08310 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
08311 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
08312 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
08313 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
08314 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
08315 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
08316 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
08317 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
08318 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
08319 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
08320 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
08321 SP MC1 NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
08400 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
08401 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
08402 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
08403 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
08404 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
08405 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
08410 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown error
08411 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
08412 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
08413 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
08414 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
08415 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
08416 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
08417 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
08418 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
08419 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
08420 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
08421 SP MC1 NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
08480 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool empty
08481 SP MC1 CAN send nav pool back
08501 SP MC1 MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
08502 SP MC1 MMCI pool is empty
08503 SP MC1 MMCI DPM error
08504 SP MC1 MMCI pool size too small during initialization
08505 SP MC1 MMCI function address is null
08506 SP MC1 MMCI received event without buffer queue
08507 SP MC1 MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
08508 SP MC1 MMCI DPM clear to send timeout
08509 SP MC1 MMCI invalid message length received
08510 SP MC1 MMCI illegal partition size
08511 SP MC1 MMCI lost data during receive
08520 SP MC1 MC2 checkword timeout
08521 SP MC1 MC2 checkword error
08522 SP MC1 MC2 invalid message type
08601 SP MC1 SI checkword timeout
08602 SP MC1 SI checkword error
08603 SP MC1 SI invalid broadcast message type
08604 SP MC1 SI invalid message type
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 231

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

08700 SP MC1 EI1 analog input fault
08701 SP MC1 EI1 VDIG voltage fault
08702 SP MC1 EI1 VDD_M voltage fault
08703 SP MC1 EI1 VEE_M voltage fault
08704 SP MC1 EI1 VREF voltage fault
08705 SP MC1 EI1 VLM voltage fault
08706 SP MC1 EI1 VLP voltage fault
08710 SP MC1 EI1 high int. freq. at digtal input
08800 SP MC1 EI2 analog input fault
08801 SP MC1 EI2 UKOM voltage fault
08802 SP MC1 EI2 VDD_M voltage fault
08803 SP MC1 EI2 VEE_M voltage fault
08805 SP MC1 EI2 temperature input fault
08810 SP MC1 EI2 lever output fault
08811 SP MC1 EI2 busy relay fault
08812 SP MC1 EI2 lever feedback fault
08814 SP MC1 EI2 watchdog
08815 SP MC1 EI/SP no master
08816 SP MC1 SP lost one of two enable signals
09001 RKE1 RAM check error

09002 RKE1 ROM check error
09003 RKE1 CAN_KB bus frame error
09004 RKE1 CAN_KB bus buffer error
09005 RKE1 CAN_KB bus protocol error
09006 RKE1 EEPROM checksum error
09007 RKE1 SYSTEM MC system error( watchdog, .... )
09008 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 startbit error
09009 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 paritybit error
09010 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 stopbit error
09011 RKE1 PS/2 Dev1 timeout error
09020 RKE1 CAN_KB OPERATING UNIT FAILURE
09021 RKE1 CAN_KB no default Slave found
09029 RKE1 COM1 error while reading byte
09030 RKE1 COM1 error while writing byte
09031 RKE1 COM1 illegal size for message type
09032 RKE1 COM1 data time out while reading
09033 RKE1 COM1 uart 1 checksum error

232 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 233

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05



234 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05



ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 235

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05



236 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05


ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 237

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

10001 VDR offline

10002 VDR no picture written, LAN connection lost
10010 VDR final recording medium data overflow
10011 VDR microphone test failed
10012 VDR error during process load
10013 VDR process aborted
10014 VDR error during picture grabbing
10016 VDR main power failure
10017 VDR UPS fault
10018 VDR audio not found
10019 VDR error during 4300 control process load
10020 VDR final recording medium bit error
10021 VDR final recording medium not connected
10022 VDR final recording medium IP control failure
10023 VDR receive timeout of NMEA 0183 data (IEC
61162-1/2) on serial interfaces or LAN
10024 VDR network error
10025 VDR external alarm
238 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 11 Index of Parameters
Technical Manual
11 Index of Parameters
A Colored Angle Display Limit 137

Acceleration 116 Commissioning Data 151
ADC Threshold Adjus 141 Compress 113
Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display 137 Config Transfer 151
Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display 137 Configure 112
Additional Alarms Setup Menu 118 Connected Monitor (Indicators) 120
Additional Information (Transceiver) 126 Connected Planning System 115
Administration 115 Conning 135
Administration (Indicators) 120 Conning (Indicators) 121
Advanced Settings (Service) 148
AFT Bridge is active String 118
AIS 115 D
AIS Channel 131 Dangerous Target Alarm (Indicators) 120
AIS Lost Target witout Alarm 118 Date & Time 102
Alarm Relays Activation Delay (Indicators) 120 Default Depth (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Allowed to be Sensor Master (Indicators) 121 Default Weather (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Analog Gyro System (Sensor Interface) 128 Default Wind (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Antenna (Transceiver) 126 Depth (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Antenna Information (Service) 149 Depth Sensor 1 (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Antenna Motor Frequency (Transceiver) 127 Depth Value 125
ARCS Database 138 Differentiated Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
ARCS User Permit Number 135 Diskette 104
ARPA 108 Displacement 136
ARPA Lost Target without Alarm 118 Displacement Table 136
Availability of additional Displays 136 Display Pitch Bar 135
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution (Transceiver) 127 Display Power Bar 135, 136
Azimuth Thruster 1...4 137 Display Selected Gyro 123, 125, 131
Azimuth Thruster Parameters 137 Distance Longitudinal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123,
Azimuth Thruster x 137 124
Distance Longitudinal (Sensor Interface) 129, 131, 132
Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver) 126
B Distance to Bow (System) 115
BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier (Sensor Interface) 133 Distance to P (System) 116
Based on Specification (Indicators) 121 Distance to SB (System) 115
Basic Radar 118 Distance to Stern (System) 115
Baud Rate (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123 Distance Transversal (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123,
Baud Rate (Sensor Interface) 131 124
Beam Width (Transceiver) 126 Distance Transversal (Sensor Interface) 129, 132
BIOS Settings 153 Distance Transversal (Transceiver) 126
Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver) 126 Double End Ferry 122
Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver) 126 Draught 136
Bottom Track (BT) Input (Sensor Interface) 129 Driver (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123
Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) (Sensor Interface)
133
Buzzer 105 E
ENC Database 138
ENC User Permit No. 135
C ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDPILOT) 114
Catalog (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125 Error Input (Sensor Interface) 128, 129
Central Dimming Adjustment 122 Expand 113
Channel (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, 124, 125
Channel (Sensor Interface) 131, 132
Channel of this Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123, F
125 Frequency Deviation (Transceiver) 126
CHARTRADAR Function (Indicators) 121 Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of 117
CHARTRADAR Function License Key (Indicators) 121 FWD Bridge is active String 118
CHARTRADAR Identification Code (Indicators) 121
Check IMB Alarm IO 142
Clutch Label 135 G
C-Map Identifier 135 Generator Parameters 136
Collapse 113 GLL, GGA Selection (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 239

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
11 Index of Parameters RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
GLL, GGA Selection (Sensor Interface) 132 Name (Indicators) 120

Guard Zone Alarm (Indicators) 120 Nominal Speed 116
Gyro (Sensor Interface) 128 Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver) 126
Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor 116 Number of Clutches 135
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor 116 Number of Generators 136
Gyro against Magnetic Compass 116 Number of Shafts 135
Gyro Input Voltage (Sensor Interface) 128
Gyro Monitoring 116
O
Output (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 132
H
Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Heading Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128 P
Headmarker (Service -> Transceiver) 145 Planning System 134
Height above Sea Level 126 PM Adjust (Service -> Transceiver) 147
PMA Display (Service -> Transceiver) 146
Position (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123
I Position (Sensor Interface) 131
Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of 117 Position (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of 117 Position against Redundant Position Sensor 118
IMB Map Storage Test 105 Position Monitoring 118
Increment (Sensor Interface) 128, 129 Position Quality Check 116
Indicator 114 Pulse Log (Sensor Interface) 128
Indicator (Service) 140
Installed Type of Tracking Facility 120
Interswitch 150 R
Interswitch (PCI) 114 Radar 120
Radar PPI Radius 121
Reference (Sensor Interface) 128
K RKE Settings 144
Keyboard 105 RKE Software Update 144
Keyboard (Indicators) 120 Route (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
RSC Test Pictures 106
RTE Message Route Identifier (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
L faces) 125
Last Modification Date (Transceiver) 127 RTE Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Length at Waterline 116
Local Indicator Number 114
Log Type (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 S
Log Type (Sensor Interface) 129, 132 Scale Generator Power Bar 136
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter- Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar 135
faces) 124 Scale Off Course Bar 135
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) Scale Off Track Bar 135
130, 132 Scale Orientation 137
Lost Target Alarm (Indicators) 120 Scale RPM Bar 135
Scale Rudder Display 135
Scale Shaft Power Bar 136
M Sector Blanking (Transceiver) 126
Magnetron (Service) 148 Security Unique Identifier (UID) 135
Magnetron Hours (Service) 149 Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets
Map Delete 103 134
Map Transfer 102 Selfcheck 105
Maximum Radius 116 Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT 134
Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 116 Sensor Interface 127
Maximum Thruster Power 137 Sensor Interface Identifier (Sensor Interface) 129
Maximum Thruster RPM 137 Sensor Interfaces 114
Minimum Radius 116 Sensor Number (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123
Monitor Adjust 140 Sensor Number (Sensor Interface) 132
Monitor Aspect Ratio 122 Serial Gyro (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 123
Monitor Control Interface 122 Serial I/O Monitor 142
Serial Output used as 125, 133
Service 139
N Service Report 152
NACOS 134, 150 Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P (Sensor Inter-
NACOS (System Layout) 114 face) 133
240 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 11 Index of Parameters
Technical Manual
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz (Indicator’s Serial In- V

terfaces) 125 VDR 115
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) (Sensor Interface) Video Anti Clutter Sea 118
131 Video MBS (Service -> Transceiver) 146
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) (Indicator’s Seri- VX Input (Sensor Interface) 130
al Interfaces) 123 VY Input (Sensor Interface) 130
Setting-to-Work (Service -> Transceiver) 145
Shaft Parameters 135
Ship Data 115 W
Ship Data for AIS 115
Software Update 143 Water Track Input (WT) (Sensor Interface) 130
Speed (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124 Weather (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Speed (Sensor Interface) 132 Wind (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Speed (Startup Sensor Selection) 118 Wind Reference (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124, 133
Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor 117 WPL Remark (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 125
Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor 118
Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor 118
Speed Capability (Transceiver) 126 X
Speed Monitoring 117 XPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130
Speed Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128
Squat Coefficient 136
Startup Sensor Selection 118 Y
STC Compensation (Service) 149 YPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130
STC Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145
System / Ship Parameters 115
System Fault Alarm (Indicators) 120
System Maintenance Manager 100
System Position (System) 115
T
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn 118
Thruster Angle Display Color 137
Thruster Angle Display Mode 137
Time (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces) 124
Time (Sensor Interface) 132
Time (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Time from Selected Position Sensor (Startup Sensor Sel-
ection) 119
Tools 102
Track Transfer 104
TRACKPILOT 114
TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Indicator’s Serial Interfaces)
125
Transceiver 114
Transceiver (Service) 145
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT 122
Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
faces) 124
Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 130,
132
Trigger Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145
Tuning Indication Gain 149
Tuning Offset (Service) 149
Type of AIS 131
Type of Generation (Transceiver) 126
U
Use Speed from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
faces) 123
Use Speed from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132
Use Time from Position Sensor (Indicator’s Serial Inter-
faces) 124
Use Time from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 241

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
11 Index of Parameters RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
242 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 12 Cabling Documents
Technical Manual
12 Cabling Documents
Title Page
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6 245
Ca ble Dia gram, Ind ex , 2/6 246
C a bl e D i a gram , Si n gl e R ada r, 3/ 6 247
C a bl e D i a gram , D u al R a dar, 4 / 6 248
C a bl e D i a gram , M ul t i pl e R ad ar, 5 /6 249
Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6 250
Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8 251
Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8 252
Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8 253
Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8 254
C o nne ct i on D i agra m, opt i on al C O M Exp and er, 5 /8 255
Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8 256
C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r u p ( Ve r s i o n A ) , 7 / 8 257
C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r d o w n ( Ve r s i o n B ) , 8 / 8 258
X - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 259
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 4 260
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 1 a / 4 261
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 4 262
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 2 a / 4 263
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d H e a t i n g c a b l i n g , 3 / 4 264
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r , 4 / 4 265
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , c a b l i n g o f I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o a r d , b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 266
S - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r , Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1 267
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 7 268
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 7 269
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d S t a r t U n i t 2 c a b l i n g , 3 / 7 270
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 4 / 7 271
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 5 / 7 272
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r , H e a t i n g a n d S t a r t U n i t 1 c a b l i n g , 6 / 7 273
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r c a b l i n g , 7 / 7 274
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , C o n n e c t i o n B o a r d i n b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1 275
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 243

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
12 Cabling Documents RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
Grounding
All components of the radar system have contacts such as bolts or terminals for grounding. Grounding is
important for EMC purposes as well as for protecting people’s lives.
Both purposes are covered by the standard grounding of the system’s housings to the ship’s metallic
structure (bolted or welded). Regardless of the type of ship’s grounding (e.g. star pattern or ground plane
pattern), no potential difference should be measurable between two different ground connectors. Potential
differences cause compensation currents on the cable shields. If the ship has no metallic structure, all
conductively connected metallic parts form an artificial ground.
All ground connections should be as short as possible. If possible, different units should be connected to
individual ground connectors. Whenever possible, metallic housings should be screwed or welded directly
to the ship’s metallic structure. If a safe grounding contact cannot be ensured, additional conductors are
necessary. Furthermore, all ground connections should have a low RF-impedance, and should be
resistant against vibration and corrosion. Grounding conductors on an open-air deck must be made of
corrosion-protected steel, and inside the ship they must be made of copper.
The grounding should be done in such a way that the connection can be inspected in a convenient
manner.
EMC Purposes
The shields of all cables must be connected at both ends if no other instructions are given.
CAUTION
The screen of the coax cables must be connected to the
cable glands or cable entries of the housings AND to the
appropriate terminals. If the screen is connected to the
terminals only, the signals might be disturbed.
See Figure 3-2 on page 29.
Protective Ground
All removable metallic parts of the housings are grounded by means of separate, flexible cables to the
main structure of the housing. It is important to connect this ground-cable after parts have been
dismounted or exchanged.
244 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5
&DEOHQR &DEOHFDWHJRU\
*HQHUDO
&DEOHOHQJWKPD[PXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGLQFDEOHGLDJUDP/HQJWK &URVVUHIHUHQFHIRU
&DEOHW\SH
Technical Manual
LVPHDVXUHGIURPFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHWWRFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHW VHFRQGSUHVHQWDWLRQ
WZLVWHGSDLUV
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
&DEOHVFUHHQWREHJURXQGHGXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGRQFRQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP RIFDEOH

QXPEHURIFRUHV
$OOHTXLSPHQWWREHJURXQGHGZLWKPPßZLUHXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHG DWVKHHWVHFWLRQ
FURVVVHFWLRQ
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
)ROORZLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDORIHTXLSPHQW
;;;;

Fig. 12-1
;;;;
1DYLJDWLRQGLVWULEXWLRQZLWKDXWRPDWLFFKDQJHRYHUEHWZHHQH[FOXVLYH
FLUFXLWVIURPPDLQDQGHPHUJHQF\SRZHUVXSSO\LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK 3OXJ6RFNHW
7&;&[[

UHJXODWLRQVRIFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
9,'(2&$%/(
)XOOFDEOH1R
522012 &DEOHW\SH
/2&$7,21 SRZHUFDEOH
&DEOHV /RFDWLRQ QXPEHURIFRUHV

7\SHVL]HDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDEOHVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHJXODWLRQV FURVVVHFWLRQ
RIWKHFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
,IQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGXVHIROORZLQJFDEOHW\SHVRUHTXLYDOHQW
<<<;;;;
3RZHU0*&+06.+&RU035;&;
035;&;[
DFFWR,(&,(&&$7$,(& (/(&7521,&81,7
7ZLVWHGSDLUV)0*&+)0.+&RU7&;&
DFFWR,(&,(&,(& 'DVKHGOLQH
+DORJHQIUHH/RZ6PRNH FDEOHLVGHILQHGLQD
&RSSHUFRQGXFWRUURXQGVWUDQGHGDFFWR,(&&ODVV GLIIHUQWH[WHUQDOV\VWHP
6FUHHQ&RSSHUEUDLGZLWKFRYHUDJH!DFFWR,(&
&RUH,GHQWLILFDWLRQ (TXLSPHQWQXPEHU *URXQGFRQQHFWLRQ6KRZQ

,QWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHVE\SDLUQXPEHUDQGFRORXU)RUFRPSDWLELOLW\ (TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6

RQO\LQFRQQHFLRQGLDJUDP
ZLWKDERYHFDEOHW\SHVIROORZLQJDSSOLHV
%8EOXH
&DEOH1XPEHUV
1&QHXWUDOFRORXUZKLWHRUEODFNRUWUDQVSDUHQW )XOOFDEOHQRFRQVLVWVRIWKHODVWGLJLWVRIGUDZLQJQXPEHUFDEOHFRGH
2QO\IRU)0.+&[[XVHFRQYHUVLRQWDEOH &DEOHVSUHVHQWHGZLWKRXWGUDZLQJGLJLWVEHORQJWRV\VWHPSUHVHQWHG
%8%. )XOOQDPHGFDEOHVFRPHIURPRWKHUV\VWHPV
1&%1
%8%8 &DEOH&RGH
1&*< <<%XVFDEOHV<< FRXQWHGIURP
;;3RZHUVXSSO\FDEOHV
6SHFLDO5HPDUNV ;;'DWDDQGFRQWUROVLJQDOFDEOHV
6FKXW]YHUPHUNQDFK',1EHDFKWHQ2%6(59(&23<5,*+7$63(5',1
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURQLFV ;;79$VLJQDOFDEOHV; V\VWHPWKDWGHOLYHUVVLJQDO
0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHWRFDEOHVZLWKKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH ;;9LGHRFDEOHV
;;5DGDUZDYHJXLGHV
OHYHOPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\ODLGLQGLYLGXDOO\LQ,URQSLSH
;;6SDUH
7REHODLGRQO\LILQWHUIDFHLVFRQQHFWHG ;6$01$&26V\VWHPQXPEHUV
RQVSHFLDOUHTXHVWRQO\ 5DGDUV\VWHP '*36SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
6XSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG 5DGDUV\VWHP /RUDQ&SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP 'RORJ
&DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF
5DGDUV\VWHP (0/RJ
FDEOHFRQGXLWDFFLQVWDOODWLRQGZJ 5DGDUV\VWHP (FKRVRXQGHU
&DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF &KDUWSLORW :LQGVHQVRU
FDEOHFRQGXLWRUODLGRQVHSDUDWHWUD\ &KDUWSLORW $,6
&KDUWSLORW %ULGJH:DWFKDODUPV\VWHP
-XQFWLRQ%R[VXSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
&KDUWSLORW 9'5
7UDFNSLORW ([WHUQ([WHUQDOV\VWHPVFDEOHV

LIQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGE\V\VWHPVXSSOLHU
'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 5(0$5.6 6+

&$%/(',$*5$0
245
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+ ,3 6+
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
5
246
&$'
3$*(,1'(;

3$*( &217(17
5(0$5.6
Fig. 12-2
3$*(,1'(;
6,1*/(5$'$5
'8$/5$'$5
08/7,3/(5$'$5
&2162/(,17(51$/
Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6


'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 3$*(,1'(; 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&$%/(',$*5$0 ,3 6+
6$0B(B063
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5

0*&+[
93++=25+= $17(11$*($5%2; 1$9,*$7,21
Technical Manual
2593++=25+= :,7+,17(*5$7(' ',675,%87,21 0*&+[ $17(11$*($5%2;
;%$1'&$9$530 75$16&(,9(5 93++=25+=
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

6%$1'&$9$530 2593++=25+=
;%$1'*5
1$9,*$7,21 ;%$1'*5 256%$1'*5
;%$1'&$9$9$530
',675,%87,21 256%$1'*5
6((127( 6%$1'&$9$530
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-3

6((127(
5$'$5
0*&+[
93++=
5$'$50$67 0$67
&$9$
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/( &$%/(
;%$1'()/(;:(//
6%$1'6%$1'&2$;

VHHOHIW
PD[P
5$'$5',63/$<
23(5$7,1*81,7
)0*&+[[
7)7$=
%'
)2533,
:,7+237,21$/
257)7$=
5$'$5$1'733$1(/
)2533,
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7 1$9,*$7,21

',675,%87,21 0*&+[ 75$16&(,9(5
93++=
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6 ;%$1'1*
&$9$
256%$1'1*
5$'$53,/27*(
Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6

25&+$575$'$5*(
2508/7,3,/27*(
(48,30(17
5220

)0*&+[[ )0*&+[[
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
VHH127( VHH127(
212))&$1 212))&$1
96
&2$;$'6 &2$;$'6
VHH127( VHH127(
79$ 79$
$/2)775$16&(,9(5 %8/.+($'75$16&(,9(5
127(
/$1

63(('
)2599$1'96833/<92/7$*(237,21$/
$/$506
+($',1*
326,7,21
326,7,21
VHH127(
75$16)250(56$5($9$,/$%/(
5*8
'($'0$15(6(7
$'',7,21$/6(1625,17(5)$&(6$5($9$,/$%/(
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
:,7+237,21$/&20(;3$1'(53&%$1'$1$/2*8(
326,7,21+($',1*63(('
,17(5)$&(3&%,167$//(',1,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
&$%/(/(1*7+2)79$&$%/(0867127(;&(('P
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127
(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
*<52
/2*
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
6(1625
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
6(1625
$,6
'(%(*

:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
&+$57
3,/27
25$,6
'(%(*
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216 6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURLQFV

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 6,1*/( 6+
247
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&$%/(',$*5$0 ,3 6+
5$'$5
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5
248

0*&+[ 0*&+[
93++=25+= 93++=25+= $17(11$*($5%2;
$17(11$*($5%2; 2593++=25+= 2593++=25+= :,7+,17(*5$7('
:,7+,17(*5$7(' ;%$1'&$9$530 1$9,*$7,21 ;%$1'&$9$530 75$16&(,9(5

75$16&(,9(5 6%$1'&$9$530 ',675,%87,21 6%$1'&$9$530
;%$1'*5
;%$1'*5 256%$1'*5
6((127(
256%$1'*5

Fig. 12-4
0*&+[ 0*&+[
5$'$50$67 93++= 93++=
5$'$50$67
&$9$ &$9$
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/( %5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
5$'$5',63/$< 5$'$5',63/$<
23(5$7,1*81,7 23(5$7,1*81,7
7)7$= 7)7$=
)2533, )2533,
%' %'
257)7$= 257)7$=
:,7+237,21$/ :,7+237,21$/
)2533, )2533,
5$'$5$1'733$1(/ 5$'$5$1'733$1(/
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7 ,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7

212))&$1
212))&$1
VHH127(
VHH127(
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6 ',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
5$'$53,/27*( 5$'$53,/27*(
25&+$575$'$5*( 25&+$575$'$5*(
2508/7,3,/27*( 2508/7,3,/27*(
Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6

79$
79$
&2$;$'6

VHH127(
VHH127(
VHH127(
79$
&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
VHH127(
,17(5&211(&7,21%2; 79$ ,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
)0*&+[[
96 96
VHH127(
212))&$1&$1
5*&8
VHH127(
/$1
127(
)2599$1'96833/<92/7$*(237,21$/
75$16)250(56$5($9$,/$%/(
$'',7,21$/6(1625,17(5)$&(6$5($9$,/$%/(:,7+
/$1

237,21$/&20(;3$1'(53&%$1'$1$/2*8(,17(5)$&(
63(('
63(('
$/$506
+($',1*
+($',1*
326,7,21
326,7,21
3&%,167$//(',1,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
VHH127(
5*8
'($'0$15(6(7
'($'0$15(6(7
&$%/(/(1*7+2)($&+79$&$%/,1*$1'
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
0867127(;&(('P
326,7,21+($',1*63(('
326,7,21+($',1*63(('
$/$506'($'0$15(6(7
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867

127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
&+$57
3,/27
25$,6
'(%(*
*<52
/2*
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
$,6
'(%(*

:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
*<52
/2*
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
$,6
'(%(*

:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO '8$/ 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&$%/(',$*5$0 ,3 6+
5$'$5
6$0B(B063
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5

Technical Manual
$17(11$*($5%2; $17(11$*($5%2; $17(11$*($5%2; $17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7(' )0*&+[[ :,7+,17(*5$7(' )0*&+[[ :,7+,17(*5$7(' :,7+,17(*5$7('

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
75$16&(,9(5 VHH127( 75$16&(,9(5 VHH127( 75$16&(,9(5 75$16&(,9(5
212))&$1 212))&$1
;%$1'*5 ;%$1'*5 6%$1'*5 ;%$1'*5
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-5

&2$;$'6 &2$;$'6
%2:5$'$5
$)75$'$5
VHH127( 5$'$50$67 VHH127(
79$ 79$
&2$;$'6 &2$;$'6 )0*&+[[
VHH127( VHH127( VHH127(
79$ 79$ 212))&$1

127(
1$9,*$7,21 $'',7,21$/32:(5&211(&7,21&$%/(6$66+2:1)256,1*/(5$'$5$5(5(48,5('
0*&+[
352&(6625 &$%/(/(1*7+2)($&+79$&$%/,1*$1'$1'
',675,%87,21 93++=+= &21752//('
0867127(;&(('P
&$9$ ,17(56:,7&+
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127
)0*&+[[
*( (;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
VHH127(
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127(;&(('P%(7:((1
212))&$1
7(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127(;&(('

(48,30(17 P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
5220
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/( ,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7
Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6

23(5$7,21 ',63/$< 23(5$7,21 ',63/$< 23(5$7,21 ',63/$<
212))&$1
VHH127(
79$
79$

',63/$<(/(&7521,&6 ',63/$<(/(&7521,&6 ',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
79$

)0*&+[[
VHH127(
VHH127(
&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
VHH127(
&2$;$'6

)0*&+[[ )0*&+[[
,17(5&211(&7,21%2; VHH127( ,17(5&211(&7,21%2; VHH127( ,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
212))&$1&$1 212))&$1&$1
96 96 96

5*&8 5*&8
VHH127( VHH127(
/$1 /$1
/$1

63(('
63(('
63(('
+($',1*
+($',1*
+($',1*
326,7,21
326,7,21
326,7,21
326,7,21
326,7,21
326,7,21

VHH127(
$/$506
$/$506
$/$506
5*8
'($'0$15(6(7
'($'0$15(6(7
'($'0$15(6(7
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
326,7,21+($',1*63(('
)0*&+[[
326,7,21+($',1*63(('
)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[

&+$57
3,/27
25$,6
'(%(*
*<52
/2*
326
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
$,6
'(%(*

:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
*<52
/2*
326
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
$,6
'(%(*

:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
27+(5
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
27+(5
6(1625
:$7&+
$/$50
6<67(0
%5,'*(
$/$50
6<67(0
'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 08/7,3/( 6+

&$%/(',$*5$0
249
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+ 5$'$5
,3 6+
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
250
&$' 5
23(5$7,1*81,7

5$'$5',63/$<
%'
7)7$=)2533,25
:,7+237,21$/
Fig. 12-6
7)7$=)2533,
5$'$5$1'733$1(/
32:(5
287 32:(5
)& )& )& +' '% 6:,7&+(' ,1

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
9*$&$%/(
'$7$&$%/(
0286(&$%/(
.(<%&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(
36 36 +'
5$'$53,/27
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6*(
Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6

32:(5
,1 %1& %1& +' &$1121 '%

P
P
P
P
P
P
1(7:25.
1(7:25.
79$&$%/(
6(5&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(
32/(&$%/(
32:(5 %1& %1& +' &$1121 '% '% 32:(5 32:(5
287 ,1 287
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;96
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURLQFV

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .18 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO &2162/( 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&$%/(',$*5$0 ,3 6+
,17(51$/
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5B$63
&DEOHQR &DEOHFDWHJRU\
*HQHUDO
&DEOHOHQJWKPD[PXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGLQFDEOHGLDJUDP/HQJWK &URVVUHIHUHQFHIRU
&DEOHW\SH
Technical Manual
LVPHDVXUHGIURPFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHWWRFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHW VHFRQGSUHVHQWDWLRQ
WZLVWHGSDLUV
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
&DEOHVFUHHQWREHJURXQGHGXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGRQFRQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP RIFDEOH

QXPEHURIFRUHV
$OOHTXLSPHQWWREHJURXQGHGZLWKPPßZLUHXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHG DWVKHHWVHFWLRQ
FURVVVHFWLRQ
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
)ROORZLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDORIHTXLSPHQW
;;;;

Fig. 12-7
;;;;
1DYLJDWLRQGLVWULEXWLRQZLWKDXWRPDWLFFKDQJHRYHUEHWZHHQH[FOXVLYH
FLUFXLWVIURPPDLQDQGHPHUJHQF\SRZHUVXSSO\LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK 3OXJ6RFNHW
7&;&[[

UHJXODWLRQVRIFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
9,'(2&$%/(
)XOOFDEOH1R
522012 &DEOHW\SH
/2&$7,21 SRZHUFDEOH
&DEOHV /RFDWLRQ QXPEHURIFRUHV

7\SHVL]HDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDEOHVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHJXODWLRQV FURVVVHFWLRQ
RIWKHFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
,IQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGXVHIROORZLQJFDEOHW\SHVRUHTXLYDOHQW
<<<;;;;
3RZHU0*&+06.+&RU035;&;
035;&;[
DFFWR,(&,(&&$7$,(& (/(&7521,&81,7
7ZLVWHGSDLUV)0*&+)0.+&RU7&;&
DFFWR,(&,(&,(& 'DVKHGOLQH
+DORJHQIUHH/RZ6PRNH FDEOHLVGHILQHGLQD
&RSSHUFRQGXFWRUURXQGVWUDQGHGDFFWR,(&&ODVV GLIIHUQWH[WHUQDOV\VWHP
6FUHHQ&RSSHUEUDLGZLWKFRYHUDJH!DFFWR,(&
Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8

&RUH,GHQWLILFDWLRQ (TXLSPHQWQXPEHU *URXQGFRQQHFWLRQ6KRZQ
,QWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHVE\SDLUQXPEHUDQGFRORXU)RUFRPSDWLELOLW\ (TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ RQO\LQFRQQHFLRQGLDJUDP
ZLWKDERYHFDEOHW\SHVIROORZLQJDSSOLHV
%8EOXH
&DEOH1XPEHUV
1&QHXWUDOFRORXUZKLWHRUEODFNRUWUDQVSDUHQW )XOOFDEOHQRFRQVLVWVRIWKHODVWGLJLWVRIGUDZLQJQXPEHUFDEOHFRGH
2QO\IRU)0.+&[[XVHFRQYHUVLRQWDEOH &DEOHVSUHVHQWHGZLWKRXWGUDZLQJGLJLWVEHORQJWRV\VWHPSUHVHQWHG
%8%. )XOOQDPHGFDEOHVFRPHIURPRWKHUV\VWHPV
1&%1
%8%8 &DEOH&RGH
1&*< <<%XVFDEOHV<< FRXQWHGIURP
;;3RZHUVXSSO\FDEOHV
6SHFLDO5HPDUNV ;;'DWDDQGFRQWUROVLJQDOFDEOHV
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURQLFV ;;79$VLJQDOFDEOHV; V\VWHPWKDWGHOLYHUVVLJQDO
0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHWRFDEOHVZLWKKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH ;;9LGHRFDEOHV
;;5DGDUZDYHJXLGHV
OHYHOPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\ODLGLQGLYLGXDOO\LQ,URQSLSH
;;6SDUH
7REHODLGRQO\LILQWHUIDFHLVFRQQHFWHG ;6$01$&26V\VWHPQXPEHUV
RQVSHFLDOUHTXHVWRQO\ 5DGDUV\VWHP '*36SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
6XSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG 5DGDUV\VWHP /RUDQ&SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP 'RORJ
&DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF
5DGDUV\VWHP (0/RJ
FDEOHFRQGXLWDFFLQVWDOODWLRQGZJ 5DGDUV\VWHP (FKRVRXQGHU
&DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF &KDUWSLORW :LQGVHQVRU
FDEOHFRQGXLWRUODLGRQVHSDUDWHWUD\ &KDUWSLORW $,6
&KDUWSLORW %ULGJH:DWFKDODUPV\VWHP
-XQFWLRQ%R[VXSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
&KDUWSLORW 9'5
7UDFNSLORW ([WHUQ([WHUQDOV\VWHPVFDEOHV

LIQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGE\V\VWHPVXSSOLHU
'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 5(0$5.6 6+
251
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
252
&$' 5B$63
3$*(,1'(;

3$*( &217(17
5(0$5.6
Fig. 12-8
3$*(,1'(;
',63/$<&211(&7,21
67$1'$5',17(5)$&(6
237,21&20(;3$1'(5
237$1$/2*,17(5)$&(
$/2)775$16&(,9(5
%8/.+($'75$16&(,9(5
Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8


'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .18 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 3$*(,1'(; 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5B$63
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6 23(5$7,1*81,7 5$'$5',63/$<
Technical Manual
.(<%2$5'P
*(25*(25*( %':,7+ 7)7$=
36
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
237,21$/5$'$5 257)7$=

75$&.%$//P $1'7323(5$7,21
36
32:(5&$%/(P )$&725<
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

Fig. 12-9
5'&&$5'
&$5'
&211(&7('
&20
32:(5
9'&287 6:,7&+(' 32:(5,1
*(*
1(7:25.
SRO 9,'(2&$%/(P 32:(5287
-
9*$287 9*$,1
&DQQRQ +' '% %1& '%
+' +'
79$

'$7$

5*

5*

'$7$
$/$50
32:(5
P
32:(5
32:(5
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
&$1
P
[6(5,(//
6:,7&+('
/
1
/
1
/
1
- - - 1(7:25. 32:(5287
3(
3(
3(
$'$3725 7% 7% 7% -

%1& %1&
&$1*1'
&$1*1'
&$1*1'
68%' +' 68%'
/
1
/
1
/
1
3(
3(
3(
SRO SRO 68%'
7% &$1$1'&$10867%(7(50,1$7(' SRO
,)7+(<67$5725(1'+(5(
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
9
96
6&5((1
79$287
6&5((1
79$,1
6&5((1
79$,1
213
211
&$1%287
&$1$287
&$1*1'
&$1%287
&$1$287
&$1%,1
&$1$,1
&$1%,1
&$1$,1
213
211
213
211
32:(5287 32:(5287
32:(5 9,$
7% 7% 7% 7% ,1 ',5(&7 )86($

/
1
3(
/
1
3(
/
1
3(
/
1
3(
%8
%8
%8
%8
1&
%8
1&

7% 7% 7% -
Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8

0$,1672237,21$/
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
,17(51$/&20(;3$1'(5
25$1$/2*,17(5)$&(
ß
3(

0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
[
5*&8
5*&8
[[
[[
&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
127(
)RU&$1EXVFRQFHSWZLULQJDQGWHUPLQDWLRQLQD
79$
79$
79$
&$1
PXOWLSOHUDGDUV\VWHPVHH
32:(5
&$1
1(7:25.
1(7:25.
FKDSWHU&$1%XV&RQFHSW7HUPLQDWLRQ
21/< )256,1*/(
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
)25'8$/ '8$/ )25'8$/
,),167$//(' ,167$//$7,21
,167$//$7,21 ,167$//$7,21
72 )520 )520 )520 72 72 72 )520

QG5DGDU QG5DGDU 7UDQVFHLYHU &KDUWSLORW QG5DGDU 7UDQVFHLYHU QG5DGDU 1DYLJDWLRQ
,QWHUFRQQ ,QWHUFRQQ RU RU$,6 ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ 'LVWULEXWLRQ
%R[ %R[ FDEOHIURP3&, %R[ %R[

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO ',63/$< 6+
253
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
&211(&7,21
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5B$63
254
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;

96
$8',2
5$'$5 '($'0$1 7$5*(7$/$50 &+$57 $/$50 +0
$/$50 5(6(7 $53$$,6 $/$50 $&. 7851
Fig. 12-10
6(5,$/ 6(5,$/ 6(5,$/ 6(5,$/
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'

7% 7%
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
ß
127(
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRILQWHUIDFHVLQGXDO
RUPXOWLSOHUDGDULQVWDOODWLRQVVHH 3(
FKDSWHU5HFRPPHQGDWLRQV
&RQFHUQLQJWKH6KLS
V6HQVRUV
5HGXQGDQF\
)RUUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUWKHJ\UR
LQWHUIDFHVHH
Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8

&RQFHUQLQJWKH&RPSDVV,QWHUIDFH
)RUUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUWKHSRVLWLRQ
VHQVRULQWHUIDFHVHH
&RQFHUQLQJWKH3RVLWLRQ6\VWHPV

)0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
)0*&+
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
[[
[[
[[
[[
[[
[[
[[
63(('
63(('
5(6(7
$/$506
+($',1*
'($'0$1
326,7,21
326,7,21
+($',1*
326,7,21
)520 )520 )520 )520 72 72 72
*\UR6\VWHP /RJ6\VWHP 3RVLWLRQ6HQVRU 3RVLWLRQ6HQVRU $,6 :DWFK$ODUP %ULGJH$ODUP
'(%(* 6\VWHP 6\VWHP

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 67$1'$5' 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
,17(5)$&(6
6$0B(B063
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5B$63
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;

96
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-11
*(*
7\SHRILQWHUIDFHLVGHILQHGE\SOXJLQSFEIRUHDFKVHULDOFKDQQHO 77/*(* 7%
&20(;3$1'(53&%237,21 /
77<*(*
56*(* -
1
5656*(*
5656 5656 5656 5656 5656
3/8*,13&% 3/8*,13&% 3/8*,13&% 3/8*,13&% 3/8*,13&%
3(
*(* *(* *(* *(* *(*
6(5,$/ 6(5,$/ 6(5,$/ 6(5,$/ 6(5,$/
-

-
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'

7% 7% 7% 7% 7%
%8
1&
%8
127(
<RXPD\RQO\LQVWDOO$QDORJ,QWHUIDFHRU
&20([SDQGHULQRQHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8

96VLQFHERWKDUHLQVWDOOHGDWWKH
VDPHORFDWLRQLQWKHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[

)0*&+
[[
2QO\&20([SDQGHUFDQEHSUHVHQWLQD
V\VWHP
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRIRWKHULQWHUIDFHVWKDQ56
VHH
FKDSWHU6HQVRU,QWHUIDFHV7%7%
ZLWK3OXJLQ$GDSWHU3FEV
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
)520
6HQVRU

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
255
&+(&. .QcSSHO 237,21&20 6+
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
(;3$1'(5
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
256
&$' 5B$63
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;

96
Fig. 12-12
*(*
$1$/2*,17(5)$&(3&%237,21 /
7%
1
-
7%
3(
7%
6(5,$/ 67 67
$,65['1
$,65['3
1&
1&
$,67['1
$,67['3
$,6*1'
567(3
667(3
767(3
$&5()
$&&20
67(3&20
63$/2*
%7
:7
;30
<30
9;
9<
*1'/2*
67$786 67$786
-
*<52,1 /2*,1 -
5;'
5;'
7;'
7;'
*1'
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%
7%

7%

%8
1&
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
127(
<RXPD\RQO\LQVWDOO$QDORJ,QWHUIDFHRU
&RP([SDQGHULQRQHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8

96VLQFHERWKDUHLQVWDOOHGDWWKH
VDPHORFDWLRQLQWKHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[

0*&+

)0*&+
[
)0*&+
[[
[[
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRIGXDOVSHHGORJDQGYDULRXV
FRPSDVVV\VWHPVVHH
FKDSWHU$QDORJ,QWHUIDFH*(*
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
)520121 )520*<52 )52063(('/2*
'(%(* 6<67(0 $/7(51$7,9(/<7210($
$,66<67(0 $/7(51$7,9(/<7210($
$/7(51$7,9(/<72
10($/$1

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO 237$1$/2* 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
,17(5)$&(
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
&$' 5B$63
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

$17(11$*($5%2;:,7+
,17(*5$7('75$16&(,9(5
;%$1'*5256%$1'*5
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-13
7(50,1$/52: 5$'$5$17(11$
;%$1'*5
6%$1'*5
/
/1
/
+($7,1*
237,21$/
/
/1
3(

5$'$575$16&(,9(5(/(&7521,&
;%$1'1*

6%$1'1*
93+

&211(&7,21%2$5'
7(50,1$7(&$1,),767$57625(1'6+(5(
/
/1
/
+($7,1*
237,21$/
/
/1
3(
213
211
&$1B$
&$1B%
*1'
9
6<1$
+0$
527
527
9((
306
&$1B$
&$1B%
213
211
67$57
6&5((1
79$287

93+
7% 7%

%8
1&
1&
%8
%8
%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8

[

0*&+

[
)0*&+
)0*&+
[[
[[
&2$;$'6
79$
&$1
&$1
32:(5
21/<)25
08/7,3/(5$'$5
,167$//$7,216
)520 )520 72
1DYLJDWLRQ ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[ ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
'LVWULEXWLRQ 96 96RU
3&,

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO $/2)7 6+
257
$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
75$16&(,9(5
6$0B(B063
671?1$&26B?
258
&$' 5B$63
7(50,1$/52:
$17(11$*($5%2;
;%$1'*5
/
/1
/
+($7
237
/
/1
3(
5$'$5$17(11$
256%$1'*5

;%$1'*5
6%$1'*5

Fig. 12-14
93+
&211(&7,21%2$5'
*1'
9
6<1$
+0$
527
527
9((
306
67$57

/
/1
/
+($7,1*
237,21$/
/
/1
3(
7% 7%

93+

%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8

&211(&7:,5(%8
6%$1'6%$1'&2$;
21/<$76%$1'
;%$1'()/(;:(//
75$16&(,9(5
7(50,1$/52: 5$'$575$16&(,9(5(/(&7521,&
;%$1'1*
;%$1'1*6%$1'1*
256%$1'1*
&211(&7,21%2$5' 7(50,1$7(&$1,),767$57625(1'6+(5(
/
/1
/
+($7,1*
237,21$/
/
/1
3(
213
211
&$1B$
&$1B%
*1'
9
6<1$
+0$
527
527
9((
306
&$1B$
&$1B%
213
211
67$57
6&5((1
79$287

93+
7% 7%

)0*&+
[[
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8
1&
%8

%8
1&
1&
%8
%8
Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8

%8
1&
%8
%8
1&
&211(&7:,5(%8
21/<$76%$1'
[

0*&+

0*&+

[
[
)0*&+
)0*&+

[[
[[
79$
&2$;$'6
&$1
&$1
32:(5
32:(5
21/<)25
)520 )520 )520 08/7,3/(5$'$5 72
1DYLJDWLRQ 1DYLJDWLRQ ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[ ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
'LVWULEXWLRQ 'LVWULEXWLRQ 96
,167$//$7,216 96RU
3&,

'$7(
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
352& .13 5$'$5
&+(&. .QcSSHO %8/.+($' 6+

$/7(5 '$7( 1$0( 67'5' 25,*,1 5(3/)25 5(3/:,7+
&211(&7,21',$*5$0 $63 6+
75$16&(,9(5
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
Technical Manual
ztr1_407.pdf
Fig. 12-15 X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 259
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
mains supply cable must be connected
to supply the transceiver electronics.
If a 3-ph motor is used, a separate
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.
ztr1_404.pdf
Fig. 12-16 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4

260 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_404a.pdf
Fig. 12-17 X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 261
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_405.pdf
Fig. 12-18 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4

262 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_405a.pdf
Fig. 12-19 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 263
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_406.pdf
Fig. 12-20 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4
264 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_400.pdf
Fig. 12-21 X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 265
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_408.pdf
Fig. 12-22 X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1
266 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_415.pdf
Fig. 12-23 S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 267
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.
ztr1_409.pdf
Fig. 12-24 S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7
268 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_410.pdf
Fig. 12-25 S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 269
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_411.pdf
Fig. 12-26 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7
270 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_412.pdf
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-27
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V Version A
(transmitter up).
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7
For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):
jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
271
ztr1_413.pdf
272
Fig. 12-28
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7

For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):
jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
ztr1_414.pdf
Fig. 12-29 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 273
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_401.pdf
Fig. 12-30 S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7
274 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_416.pdf
Fig. 12-31 S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 275
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
276 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
Title Page
Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ 278
Disp lay Ele ctronic s U nit with mo unte d Inte rc onn ec tio n B ox , GE3 062 G050 MB 1 /3 279
Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3 280
Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3 281
23 " C on so le M on i to r, ya r d m ou nt i ng , A Z3 063 G 055 M B 282
23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB 283
23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB 284
C 5 C on sol e St an d- al on e w it h 23 " M oni t o r, AZ3 063 G 058 M B 285
19 " C on so le M on i to r, ya r d m ou nt i ng , A Z3 068 G 055 M B 286
19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB 287
19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB 288
C 5 C on sol e St an d- al on e w it h 19 " M oni t o r, AZ3 068 G 058 M B 289
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 290
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 296
Ope rating Un it (fo r sh ipyard in stallatio n), BD30 27 O000 MB 302
Tr a c k b a l l O p e r a t i n g U n i t ( f o r s h i p y a r d ’ s i n s t a l l a t i o n ) , B D 3 0 2 8 O 0 0 0 M B 303
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 277

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
ztr1_321.pdf
Fig. 13-1 Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ

278 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
GE3062G050MB-001--
Fig. 13-2 Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 279
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
GE3062G050MB-002--
Fig. 13-3 Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3

280 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
GE3062G050MB-003--
Fig. 13-4 Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 281
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-5 23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB

282 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-6 23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 283
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-7 23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB

284 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-8 C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 285
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-9 19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB

286 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-10 19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 287
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-11 19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB

288 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-12 C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 289
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M
290
A 30° A
AIR VENTILATION
Fig. 13-13
1150
13 Outline Drawings
B B
750
670
606,76
C C
0
550
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3

Type of enclosure : IP22
E
300005562
Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:15

SCC C4
STANDARD 0.5 Werkstoff
2002 Datum Name

Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
Norm for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
STN ATLAS Marine Electronics Blatt
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 1
Member of the EuroMarine Group
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
Zust. Änderung Datum Name Urspr. Ers.f.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
VIEW A
Technical Manual
0
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
HANDRAIL
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
63
Fig. 13-14
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor

C C
VIEW A
566,50
600 VIEW B
D D

VIEW B
E
300005562

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 2
291
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
292
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
0
20
100
450
530
550
Fig. 13-15
13 Outline Drawings
B 0 B
16
20
100
A A
190
C C
AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
390
470
D 490 D

FRONT
HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm

1.0 * DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005562
* EQUALITY ACCORDING TO
DIN ISO 1101
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm. STANDARD
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO
FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS 2002 Datum Name
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
DECK Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
F
A-A (1 : 2) MSV 42
KS 3004 O 000 GZ 3
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\700_M_AZ3054
30°
A A
AIR VENTILATION
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
1150
Fig. 13-16
B B
740
660

596,76
C C
0
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D

E
300005563

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 1
293
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
294
A A
VIEW A
HANDRAIL
63
Fig. 13-17
13 Outline Drawings
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
VIEW B
578
611
D D

VIEW B
E
300005563

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 2
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
Technical Manual
0
20
100
600
680
700
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-18
0
20 16
B B
100

A A
190
C C
390 AVAILABLE SPACE

FOR CABLE INPUT
470
490
D D

FRONT
1.0 * HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm

DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005563
DIN ISO 1101 Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY SCC C4
FLOOR LEVEL 0.5 Werkstoff
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS STANDARD
THAN 1mm.
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO 2002 Datum Name
DECK FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Norm
A-A (1 : 2) DISTANCE OF 1mm ) for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3004 O 100 GZ 3
295
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M_Stand_Alone
296
A 30° A
AIR VENTILATION
1150
Fig. 13-19
13 Outline Drawings
B B
750
670
606,76
C C
0
550
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3

E
300005564

SCC C4 Werkstoff
STANDARD 0.5
2002 Datum Name

Bearb. 12.Sep. Het
Section 550, Monitor Cons.
Norm Stand Alone for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 1
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
VIEW A
Technical Manual
0
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
HANDRAIL
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
63
Fig. 13-20
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor

C C
VIEW A
566,50
600 VIEW B
D D
VIEW B

E
300005564

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 2
297
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
298
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
0
20
100
450
530
550
Fig. 13-21
13 Outline Drawings
B 0 B
16
20
100
A A
190
C C
AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
390
470
D 490 D
FRONT

HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm
1.0 * DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005564
DIN ISO 1101
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm. STANDARD
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO
FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS 2002 Datum Name
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Bearb. 12.Sep. Het Section 550, Monitor Cons.
DECK Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
F
A-A (1 : 2) MSV 42
KS 3005 O 000 GZ 3
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30°
A A
AIR VENTILATION
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
1150
Fig. 13-22
B B
740
660

596,76
C C
700
0
490
640
1090
AIR VENTILATION
D D

E
300005565

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 1
299
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
300
A A
VIEW A
HANDRAIL
63
Fig. 13-23
13 Outline Drawings
B B
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
C C
VIEW A
VIEW B
578
611
D D
VIEW B

E
300005565

SCC C4
0.5 Werkstoff
STANDARD
2002 Datum Name
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 2
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Technical Manual
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
FOUNDATION VIEW
Technical Manual
0
20
100
600
680
700
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-24
0
20 16
B B
100

A A
190
C C
390 AVAILABLE SPACE

FOR CABLE INPUT
470
490
D D
FRONT

1.0 * HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm
DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
E
50-200mm 300005565
DIN ISO 1101 Freimaßtoleranzen Oberfläche Maßstab: 1:5
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY SCC C4
FLOOR LEVEL 0.5 Werkstoff
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS STANDARD
THAN 1mm.
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO 2002 Datum Name
DECK FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS Gepr. 12.Sep. Hohorst
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A Norm
A-A (1 : 2) DISTANCE OF 1mm ) Stand Alone for CRT and TFT
F MSV 42
KS 3005 O 100 GZ 3
301
13 Outline Drawings
3 Bl.
1 2 3 4 Ers.d.
Technical Manual
ztr1_327.pdf
Fig. 13-25 Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB

302 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
ztr1_328.pdf
Fig. 13-26 Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyard’s installation), BD3028O000 MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 303
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
304 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record
Technical Manual
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record

0°
345° 15°
330° 30°
315° 45°
300° 60°
285° 75°
270° 90°
255° 105°
240° 120°
225° 135°
Example: 0°
210° 150°
315° 45° 195° 165°
180°
270° 90°
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
225° 135°
Blind Sector
(outer circle) 180°
Ship’s Name: Antenna Location:
Transmitter No.: Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company: Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 305
t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual

0°
345° 15°
330° 30°
315° 45°
300° 60°
285° 75°
270° 90°
255° 105°
240° 120°
225° 135°
Example: 0°
210° 150°
315° 45° 195° 165°
180°
270° 90°
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
225° 135°
Blind Sector
(outer circle) 180°
Ship’s Name: Antenna Location:
Transmitter No.: Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company: Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:

306 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100 Notes
Technical Manual
Notes
Space for your notes:
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09) 307

t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05
Notes RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100
Technical Manual
308 ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05

Sam Electronics 1100 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Sam Electronics 1100 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Technical Manual

Including Installation Instructions

Display Electronics Units

Item No.: ED3051G542 Revision: 02 (2005-09) Order No.: 390001631

SAM Electronics GmbH

4.2 "Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.12.1.9 Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

6 Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

7 Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

8.4.1 Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

9 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

10 System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

10.2 AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

11 Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

12 Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

13 Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Fig. 1-1 Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Fig. 5-11 Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:

1.1 Software Releases

1.2 Hardware Versions

Rev., marked by "X"

Order No. Item No. of Serial No.

Fig. 1-1 Version label

Item No. of the pcb itself, Print version

Fig. 1-2 Pcb labelling

1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

1.4 Safety Warnings

If a synchro or a stepper is connected, dangerous voltages

Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for

The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the

1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically

1.6 Safety Switches

X-Band S-Band Version B

250 mm 23.1" 340 mm

Fig. 2-1 System overview

RADARPILOT 1102 / ARPA - 2A8X

Options: Antenna Size:

AIS/EPA = manual (not for MULTIPILOT) 1 = 12.5 kW X-Band

Fig. 2-2 Nomenclature

Fig. 2-3 Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled

Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ship’s Sensors

Additional Sensor Interfaces

RGB Buffer/Video Switch

Remote Keyboard Electronics

2.2.3 Operating Units

Fig. 2-4 Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards

2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment

For the CHARTRADAR 1100, see Section 2.5.

2.4 Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100

2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100

- Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.

2.5.3 User Chart Objects

Interconnection CAN Bus Interconnection UAIS

Fig. 2-5 Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit

2.7 VDR DEBEG 4300

3.1 General Recommendations

Fig. 3-1 Preparation of the cable endings

Fig. 3-2 Cable glands with grounding inserts

Metal clamp inside Installation cables

35+5 Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing;